7000 SERIES T

& CENTURION T
LATHE
Operation Manual

Version 3.6

November 2008

1400 Mill Lane

Waconia, MN 55387

952- 442-1410
952-442-1401 Technical Support
952-442-1418 Parts
http://www.milltronics.net/
© Copyright 2000 Milltronics Manufacturing
All Rights Reserved
 PREFACE
The Centurion 7T, 6T and 5T have two controllable axes in their basic configuration: X and Z.
This manual assumes that the tool moves with respect to the work piece.

This manual describes the operation of the Centurion 5T, 6T, 7T, and 7000T Series CNC
controls. Although the 7000 Series control features an updated front panel design, from the
operator’s standpoint there is no visible difference. Functionality is the same in all controls. The
Centurion 7/7000 Series hardware offers enhanced performance, larger memory, and faster
processing. When this manual makes reference to 7000 Series, or 7000T Series it implies
Centurion 5, 6, and 7 also.

This manual is divided into two sections; M & G code programming and conversational
programming. The conversational programming section is designed primarily to explain the
various menus, screen entries, and the general flow from one screen to another. It does not go
into any detail on how the various functions work. Detailed explanations of each function are
covered in the M & G code section and should be referenced there if any questions arise.

- iii -
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE ...................................................................................................................................... iii

AXIS DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 1
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 3
SECTION ONE - PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 5
Block ................................................................................................................................... 5
Program............................................................................................................................... 6
Main program, subprogram, and subroutines ..................................................................... 6
Command format ranges..................................................................................................... 7
Command formats for axes: M and G codes ...................................................................... 8
SECTION TWO - PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES ................................................. 9
G Codes............................................................................................................................... 9
Positioning (G00) rapid traverse (modal) ......................................................................... 11
Linear interpolation (G01) ................................................................................................ 13
Polar definition of a line ................................................................................................... 13
Circular interpolation (G02, G03)..................................................................................... 15
Clockwise and Counterclockwise Directions Describing an Arc Center ......................... 16
Programming with Circular Interpolation......................................................................... 16
Describing an Arc Using a Radius and No Center ........................................................... 16
Arc End Points .................................................................................................................. 16
Describing an Arc Using Absolute Center and Trig Help ................................................ 17
Describing an Arc Using Polar Definitions ...................................................................... 23
Corner rounding ................................................................................................................ 26
Angle chamfering.............................................................................................................. 27
Back line ........................................................................................................................... 27
Other Notes on Circular and Linear Turning.................................................................... 29
Dwell command (G04) ..................................................................................................... 30
Exact stop (G09) ............................................................................................................... 30
Set data on/off (G10, G11)................................................................................................ 30
Clear floating zero (G12) .................................................................................................. 31
Back / Front Programming (G13 / G14) ........................................................................... 31
Inch dimensioning mode (modal) (G20)........................................................................... 32
Metric dimensioning mode (modal) (G21) ....................................................................... 32
Safe zone off/on (G22, G23)............................................................................................. 33
Reference point return (G28, G29, G30) ......................................................................... 33
Threading (G32, G34-G36) ............................................................................................. 34
Return to initial level or to R level (G38/G39) ................................................................. 35
Cutter compensation (G40, G41, G42) ............................................................................. 35
Non-movement (G65)....................................................................................................... 43
Z to clearance (G45) ......................................................................................................... 46
X to Clearance (G46) ........................................................................................................ 46
Z to tool change (G47)...................................................................................................... 47
X to tool change (G48) ..................................................................................................... 47
Tool length offsets cancel (G49)....................................................................................... 47
Coordinate Systems .......................................................................................................... 47
Floating zero (G50)........................................................................................................... 47
Local coordinate system (G52)......................................................................................... 49

v
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Machine coordinate system (G53) .................................................................................... 50

Work coordinate systems (G54 - G59) ............................................................................. 51
Single direction or one shot rapid positioning (G60)........................................................ 52
Exact stop mode (modal) (G61)........................................................................................ 52
Tapping mode (modal) (G63) ........................................................................................... 52
Cutting mode (modal) (G64) ............................................................................................ 52
Finish Cycle (G70)............................................................................................................ 52
Rough Turning Cycle (G71) ............................................................................................. 55
Rough Facing Cycle (G72) ............................................................................................... 61
Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73) .............................................................................................. 66
Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G76)............................................................................... 69
Cycle 1 (G92).................................................................................................................... 72
Drilling, Tapping and Grooving ....................................................................................... 75
Drilling.............................................................................................................................. 75
Retraction.......................................................................................................................... 75
Face Grooving/High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G74) ................................................... 79
Diameter Grooving (G75)................................................................................................. 81
Drill Cycle (G81) .............................................................................................................. 83
Drill Dwell Cycle (G82) ................................................................................................... 84
Drill Peck Cycle (G83) ..................................................................................................... 85
Tap Cycle (G84) ............................................................................................................... 86
Bore Cycle (G85).............................................................................................................. 87
High Speed Boring Cycle (G86)....................................................................................... 88
Bore/Dwell Cycle (G89) ................................................................................................... 89
Cycle A (G90)................................................................................................................... 91
Cycle B (G94) ................................................................................................................... 94
Incremental mode (G91) ................................................................................................... 95
Absolute mode (G93)....................................................................................................... 96
Constant Surface Speed (CSS) (G96) ............................................................................... 96
Feed Per Minute (G98) ..................................................................................................... 97
Feed per Revolution (G99) ............................................................................................... 97
Cancel mirror image (G501), Set mirror image (G511) ................................................... 98
Cancel scaling (G550), Set scaling (G551)....................................................................... 98
Coordinate system rotation (G568 - G569) ...................................................................... 99
G990/G991 Store Restore Parameters ............................................................................ 101
Read byte parameter (G995)........................................................................................... 102
Write byte parameter (G996) .......................................................................................... 102
Force Error (G997) ......................................................................................................... 103
Beep (G998).................................................................................................................... 103
Custom G Codes ............................................................................................................. 103
Force Fatal Error (G999) ................................................................................................ 103
SECTION THREE - MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS) ........................... 105
Program stop (M00)........................................................................................................ 106
Optional stop (M01)........................................................................................................ 106
Block skip ( / )................................................................................................................. 106
End of program (M02, M30, M99)................................................................................. 106

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Spindle on/off (M03, M04, M05) ................................................................................... 106

Tool change (M06) ......................................................................................................... 106
Coolants on/off (M08, M09)........................................................................................... 107
Wait channel (M32) ........................................................................................................ 107
Miscellaneous M codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60)........................ 107
Graphics off/on (M90, M91)........................................................................................... 107
Subprogram call (M98) Subprogram terminate (M99)................................................... 107
Preparation of subprogram.............................................................................................. 108
Subprogram execution .................................................................................................... 108
SECTION FOUR - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING ........................................................... 111
Parametric Reference ...................................................................................................... 111
Parametric Assignment Statement .................................................................................. 111
Byte Parameter (In this case PB50 is spindle range.) .................................................... 111
Parametric operators Arithmetic operators ..................................................................... 112
Relational operators ........................................................................................................ 113
Function operators .......................................................................................................... 113
Mathematic expressions.................................................................................................. 114
Conditional statements.................................................................................................... 114
IF THEN ......................................................................................................................... 115
WHILE WEND............................................................................................................... 115
Transfer statements ......................................................................................................... 116
GOTO statement ............................................................................................................. 116
CALL statement.............................................................................................................. 116
GOSUB and RETURN ................................................................................................... 117
Computational Functions ................................................................................................ 118
Back line ......................................................................................................................... 122
Miscellaneous Commands .............................................................................................. 124
IPIN................................................................................................................................. 128
Parts Inspection and Digitizing Commands.................................................................... 129
MOD ............................................................................................................................... 129
ORIGIN........................................................................................................................... 130
HOME............................................................................................................................. 130
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION.................................................................... 133
F1 (Home) Main-Home .................................................................................................. 137
F10 (Here) Home-Here ................................................................................................... 138
F2 JOG (MAIN-JOG) ..................................................................................................... 138
F3 HDW (MAIN-HDW)................................................................................................. 139
F4 RUN (MAIN-RUN)................................................................................................... 143
F9 RESUM (MAIN-RUN) ............................................................................................. 144
F2 OLD (MAIN-RUN-OLD) ......................................................................................... 145
F3 BLOCK (MAIN-RUN).............................................................................................. 145
F4 OSTOP (MAIN-RUN)............................................................................................... 145
F5 BSKIP (MAIN-RUN)................................................................................................ 145
F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ............................................................................................. 146
F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist ...................................................................................... 146
F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error ................................................................................... 147

vii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph................................................................................ 147

F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan............................................................................. 148
F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind....................................................................... 149
F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto......................................................................... 149
F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph ............................................................................... 149
F6 (Zoom+) Main-Run-Displ-Graph .............................................................................. 149
F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph ................................................................................. 150
F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph.................................................................................. 150
F8 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph ................................................................................. 150
F10 (Clear) Main-Run-Displ-Graph ............................................................................... 150
F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag .................................................................................... 150
F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs...................................................................................... 152
F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell ................................................................................... 152
F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu ........................................................................................... 152
F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry ................................................................................................. 153
F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW......................................................................................... 153
F5 (MDI) Main-MDI - Manual data input...................................................................... 154
GCODE (MAIN-MDI-MCODE).................................................................................... 156
MCODE (MAIN-MDI-MCODE)................................................................................... 157
F6 (Displ) Main-Displ..................................................................................................... 157
F7 (Parms) Main-Parms.................................................................................................. 158
F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup ........................................................................................ 158
F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec.................................................................................. 160
F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power............................................................................ 160
F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis ................................................................................. 166
F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc ................................................................................ 171
Basic Machine Info ......................................................................................................... 171
Software Options ............................................................................................................ 177
CAD Parameters ............................................................................................................. 178
Post M codes Table......................................................................................................... 179
Spindle Power Monitoring.............................................................................................. 179
European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions.................................................. 181
F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-Ovrs-FdOvr .................................................................. 183
F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-Ovrs-HwOvr ............................................................... 184
F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-Ovrs-SpOvr .................................................................. 185
F7 (BScrw) Main-Parms-Setup-BScrw .......................................................................... 186
F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-Dos.................................................................................. 186
F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord....................................................................................... 187
F3 (Tool) Main-Parms-Tool ........................................................................................... 188
F4 (Wear) Main-Parms-Wear ......................................................................................... 189
F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save ........................................................................................... 190
F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load .......................................................................................... 190
F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog ........................................................................................... 190
F9 (Ctrl) Main-Parms-Ctrl .............................................................................................. 192
New Thread Crest ........................................................................................................... 192
Serial Port Data ............................................................................................................... 195

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Tool Setter Parameters.................................................................................................... 196

Bar Feed Parameters ....................................................................................................... 196
Addition Control Parameters .......................................................................................... 196
F10 (User) Main-Parms-User ......................................................................................... 198
F8 (Prog) Main-Prog....................................................................................................... 198
F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text .............................................................................................. 199
F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit ....................................................................................... 199
Text Editing Terms ......................................................................................................... 199
Entering and Editing Text............................................................................................... 199
Key Definitions............................................................................................................... 200
F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block ......................................................................... 200
F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr........................................................................... 201
F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words ....................................................................... 202
F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc ............................................................................ 202
F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins................................................................................... 204
F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del................................................................................. 204
HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf........................................................................ 204
F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New ..................................................................................... 205
F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old ........................................................................................ 205
F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any....................................................................................... 205
F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu.................................................................................. 206
F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv............................................................................................ 207
F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit...................................................................................... 207
Definitions of the Edit Keys ........................................................................................... 208
Definitions of the Store/Input Keys ................................................................................ 211
F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New.................................................................................... 212
F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old ....................................................................................... 212
F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any ..................................................................................... 212
Main-Prog-Conv ............................................................................................................. 212
F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu ................................................................................ 214
F9 (Verf) Main-Verf ....................................................................................................... 214
F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block .......................................................................................... 216
F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop......................................................................................... 216
F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip ......................................................................................... 217
F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ............................................................................................ 217
F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist..................................................................................... 217
F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error .................................................................................. 217
F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph ............................................................................... 218
F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag..................................................................................... 218
F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry................................................................................................. 219
F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum............................................. 219
F10 (Util) Main-Util ....................................................................................................... 219
F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files............................................................................................... 219
F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load..................................................................................... 220
F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save...................................................................................... 221
F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename ........................................................................... 221

ix
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy.................................................................................... 221

F5 (8Ram) Main-Util-Files-4Ram .............................................................................. 221
F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase ................................................................................... 221
F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232......................................................................................... 221
F1 (COM1 or COM 2) .................................................................................................... 221
F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send .................................................................................. 222
F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev .............................................................................. 222
F7 (8Ram) Main-Util-RS232-8Ram ........................................................................... 223
F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC ............................................................................................. 223
F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast ....................................................................................... 224
F1 (RS232)...................................................................................................................... 224
F2 (File) .......................................................................................................................... 224
F3 (Disk) ......................................................................................................................... 224
F4 (Any).......................................................................................................................... 224
F5 (Old)........................................................................................................................... 224
F6 (Ram4) ..................................................................................................................... 224
F1 (First) ......................................................................................................................... 225
F2 (Block) ....................................................................................................................... 225
F3 (Tool) ......................................................................................................................... 225
F4 (Cont)......................................................................................................................... 225
F9 (Skip) ......................................................................................................................... 225
F10 (Mirr) ....................................................................................................................... 225
F3 (Fast) .......................................................................................................................... 225
F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run ....................................................................................... 226
F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf...................................................................................... 226
F7 (Chart) Main-Util-Chart............................................................................................. 227
F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info ................................................................................................. 227
F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std............................................................................................ 227
F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys........................................................................................... 229
F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp.............................................................................................. 229
F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path ........................................................................................ 230
F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time ..................................................................................... 231
F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram ....................................................................................... 231
F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag....................................................................................... 232
F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank ........................................................................................... 232
F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command ........................................................................... 232
Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV................................................................................... 232
SECTION SIX - CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS ..................................................... 233
Program setup ................................................................................................................. 234
F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos ....................................................................................... 235
F2 (Turn) Main-Prog-Conv-Turn ................................................................................... 235
F1 (Ruff) Main-Prog-Turn-Ruff ..................................................................................... 236
F2 (Patrn) Main-Prog-Turn-Patrn ................................................................................... 239
F3 (Finsh) Main-Prog-Turn-Finsh .................................................................................. 240
F4 (Cyc A) Main-Prog-Turn-Cyc A ............................................................................... 246
F5 (Line) Main-Prog-Turn-Line ..................................................................................... 249

x
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

F6 (Arc) Main-Prog-Turn-Arc........................................................................................ 250

F7 (Tangs) Main-Prog-Turn-Tangs ................................................................................ 251
F8 (Cgen) Main-Prog-Turn-CGen .................................................................................. 255
F9 (End) Main-Prog-Turn-End ....................................................................................... 255
F3 (Face) Main-Prog-Face.............................................................................................. 256
F1 (Ruff) Main-Prog-Face-Ruff ..................................................................................... 256
F2 (Patrn) Main-Prog-Face-Patrn ................................................................................... 258
F3 (Finsh) Main-Prog-Face-Finsh .................................................................................. 259
F4 (Cyc B) Main-Prog-Face-Cyc B................................................................................ 263
F4 (Thrd) Main-Prog-Thrd ............................................................................................. 267
F1 (Multp) Main-Prog-Thrd-Multp ................................................................................ 267
F2 (Cyc 1) Main-Prog-Thrd-Cyc 1 ................................................................................. 272
F5 (Line) Main-Prog-Thrd-Line ..................................................................................... 275
F5 (Drill) Main-Prog-Drill.............................................................................................. 276
Drill Cycle....................................................................................................................... 276
Drill Dwell Cycle............................................................................................................ 277
Drill Peck Cycle.............................................................................................................. 278
Face Grooving Cycle ...................................................................................................... 279
Bore Cycle ...................................................................................................................... 282
Bore/Dwell Cycle............................................................................................................ 283
Right Tap Cycle .............................................................................................................. 285
Left Tap Cycle ................................................................................................................ 286
Diameter Grooving Cycle ............................................................................................... 288
F6 (Tool) Main-Prog-Tool.............................................................................................. 290
F7 (Misc) Main-Prog-Misc ............................................................................................. 291
F7 (Call) Main-Prog-Call................................................................................................ 292
F8 (Spec) Main-Prog-Spec ............................................................................................. 292
F1 (Cad) Main-Prog-Spec-Cad ....................................................................................... 292
F3 (Scale) Main-Prog-Spec-Scale................................................................................... 294
F4 (Rot) Main-Prog-Spec-Rot ........................................................................................ 295
F5 (Mirr) Main-Prog-Spec-Mirr ..................................................................................... 295
F7 (Flz) Main-Prog-Spec-Flz.......................................................................................... 296
End of Program ............................................................................................................... 296
APPENDIX................................................................................................................................. 297
Error Messages................................................................................................................ 297
Byte Parameters .............................................................................................................. 311
Real Parameters .............................................................................................................. 316
J1-J4 I/O Scheme ............................................................................................................ 320

xi
 AXIS DEFINITIONS
All directions are referenced with respect to the tool. The following illustrates the X and Z
directions.

The control can be setup so the X+ is either towards that operator or away from the operator.
Machines that have a tool holder on the front side of the spindle are normally configured with
X+ being towards the operator and machines that have a tool holder on the back side of the
spindle are normally configured with X- being towards the operator. The parameter used to
define this orientation is the POWER parameter “Front Turret”. When set to “Yes” the tool is
shown coming from the bottom on the graphics screen. It also relates the tool types in the tool
table as coming from the bottom. A G13 can be used to specify back side programming or a G14
for front side programming.

When programming from the front verses from the back there are 3 differences:
1) G2/G3 or Clockwise/Counterclockwise arcs
2) G41/G42 or Left/Right cutter comp
3) The polar lines and arcs angles are different

1
AXIS DEFINITIONS

End Angle G2
170° 200° Clockwise

G42
Right Comp.

Start Angle
270°

Start Angle
90°

G41
Left Comp.
190° End angle G3
160° Counterclockwise

It is possible to mix programming between front and back from one program to another, but it
may cause confusion. Also note that all the examples in the manual are written using back side
programming.

2
 INTRODUCTION
A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called a program. By
specifying commands the tool is moved along a straight line or arc, and machine functions such
as coolant on/off, tool change or spindle on/off are performed.

The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called interpolation.

linear interpolation circular interpolation

When the commanded position to be reached by the tool is executed, the CNC moves the tool to
that position via one of the interpolation modes, circular or linear. The position is given as a
coordinate value in a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system.

Coordinates

The position to be reached by the tool is commanded with a coordinate value referenced to the
above coordinate system. The coordinate value consists of one component for axis X and Z.

3
INTRODUCTION

Coordinate values may be given in either absolute or incremental mode. In absolute mode the
tool moves to a point the programmed distance from the zero point of the coordinate system.

In incremental mode the tool moves to a point the programmed distance from the current tool po-
sition.

4
 SECTION ONE - PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
By definition, a program is a group of commands given to the CNC for operating a machine. By
specifying commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is
turned on and off. In a program, specify the commands in the sequence of actual tool
movements.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Program Tool movement sequence
.
.
.

Block

A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The program consists of a
group of blocks for a series of machine moves. An optional number for definition of each move
is called the block number, and the number for naming each program is called the program
number.

The block and the program have the following configurations.

Block

Each block begins with an optional number and ends with a <CR> carriage return.

5
SECTION ONE – PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

Program

Normally a program number is specified at the beginning of a program, and a program end code
(M99, M02, M30) is specified at the end of the program. Neither is required; however, it may be
advantageous to omit the program end code from programs that are used as subprograms. An end
program code is assumed when the end of the main program is encountered.

Main program, subprogram, and subroutines

When it is necessary to machine the same pattern at many places on a part, a program for the
pattern should be created. This is called a subprogram. When a “M98" or “Call” (subprogram
call) appears in the main program, the commands of the subprogram are performed before
execution of the next block of the main program.

Subprograms can be used to build part libraries of commonly used patterns and can reside
anywhere in memory.

6
 SECTION ONE – PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

Command format ranges

The basic address and command value ranges are listed in the table below. Note these figures
give the maximum numerical limit for the control. These limits will always be greater than or
equal to the physical limits of the machine. The machine limits are set via parameters in the
machine setup section of the control.

Command Format Ranges

FUNCTIONS COMMAND INCH INPUT METRIC INPUT

LETTER

Subprogram # and O 1 - 9999 1 - 9999

Program #

Sequence # N 1 - 99999 1 - 99999

Preparatory G 0 - 999 0 - 999

function

Dimension * words XYZUVWQ 0 ± 999.9999 0 ± 9999.9999

ABCIJKRP

Dwell P .01 - 9999.99 .01 - 9999.99

Feedrates * F .1 - 999.9 .1 - 9999

Spindle speed * S 1 - 99999 1 - 99999

Tools T 0 - 99 0 - 99

Misc. function M 0 - 999 0 - 255

Repeat or loop L 0 - 999 0 - 999

*These functions have selectable decimal positions. There may be any number of leading or
trailing places as long as the total number of digits fits in the field.

7
SECTION ONE – PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

Command formats for axes: M and G codes

Axis commands can be programmed in a calculator format. No leading or trailing zeros are
necessary. Whole numbers may be programmed without the decimal point. A decimal point may
be used with mm, inches, or second values. The location of the decimal point is as follows.

Z15.0 Z15 millimeters or Z15 inches (same as Z15)

F10.0 10 mm/min., or 10 inch/min. (same as F10)
G04 P1 Dwell for one second (same as G4 P1)

The following addresses can be used with a decimal point: X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R,

F, P, Q, AA, AB, XC, YC, ZC, E, H, L, N, O, S, and T.

Axis Min/Max Values for Standard Systems

Least Increment Maximum Value

Metric 0.001 mm 99999.999 mm
English 0.0001 inch 99999.9999 inch
Degrees 0.001 deg 99999.999 deg

Axis positions are stored in floating point; therefore, digit commands greater than 8 will be
accepted.

8
 SECTION TWO - PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES
These codes are used if the operator is programming the control in the text or MDI mode. They
are also generated from conversation programs. It should be noted that most programmers,
particularly new ones, use the conversational programming mode. If you are planning to use the
text mode of programming, pay close attention to this section explaining these codes. If you are
planning to use conversational programming, you can ignore or skim this section and concentrate
on the conversational section.

The preparatory function code is a two-digit number preceded by the letter G. Preparatory
functions are used to determine the program operating mode and are divided into two types: one-
shot and modal. One-shot G codes are only in effect during execution of the block in which they
are present. Modal G codes establish operating modes, which remain in effect until replaced by
another mode in the same category. If the G code is less than 10, the zero entry is optional (G2 or
G02).

The following table lists G codes accepted by the 7000T Series control system. Each code will
have a detailed explanation later in the manual.

G Codes
Active On
Modal One Shot
Power-up
00 Rapid Positioning X
01 Linear interpolation X X
02 Circular/helical interpolation CW X
03 Circular/helical interpolation CCW X
04 Dwell X
09 Exact stop X
10 Set data on X
11 Set data off X X
12 Clear floating zero X
1
13 Back Side Programming * X
14 Front Side Programming *1 X
20 Inch input *2 X
21 Metric input *2 X
22 Safe zone check off *3 X
23 Safe zone check on *3 X

1 Back Side or Front Side programming is selectable on power-up via a parameter.

2 G20 and G21 are selectable on power up via a parameter.
3 Safe Zone on or off is selectable on power-up via a parameter.

9
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Active On
Modal One Shot
Power-up
28-30 Reference point return X
32 Threading X
34-36 Threading X
38 Initial Point Return X
39 R-Plane Return X
40 Cutter compensation cancel X X
41 Cutter compensation left X
42 Cutter compensation right X
45 Z to Clearance X
46 X to Clearance X
47 Z to tool change X
48 X to tool change X
49 Cancel H offset X
50 Set FLZ, Max RPM’s X
52 Local coordinate system set X
53 Machine coordinate system X
54 Work coordinate 1 system (G540...G549) X X
55-59 Work coordinate 2-6 system (G5#0...G5#9) X
60 One-Shot Rapid X
61 Exact stop mode X
63 Tapping mode X
64 Cutting X X
65 Non-movement X
70 Finish Cycle X
71 Rough Turning X
72 Rough Facing X
73 Pattern Repeat X
74 Face Grooving X
75 Diameter Grooving X
76 Threading Cycle X
80 Cancel canned cycle X X
81 Drill X
82 Drill/dwell X
83 Peck/drill X

10
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Active On
Modal One Shot
Power-up
84 Tap X
85 Bore X
86 Bore / Spindle Stop X
89 Bore / Dwell X
90 Turning Cycle A X
91 Incremental dimension X
92 Thread Cutting Cycle X
93 Absolute X X
94 Facing Cycle B X
4
96 Constant Surface Speed * X
97 Revs per Minute *4 X
98 Feed per Minute *5 X
99 Feed per Rev. *5 X
501 Mirror Image OFF X X
511 Mirror Image ON X
550 Scaling OFF X X
551 Scaling ON X
568 Rotation ON X
569 Rotation OFF X X
990 Store parameters X
991 Read parameters X
995 Read byte parameters X
996 Set byte parameters X
997 Force error X
998 Beep X
999 Force Fatal Error X

Note: Unrecognized G codes will cause an error 549 to occur.

Positioning (G00) rapid traverse (modal)

G00 specifies positioning in rapid traverse mode. There is no need to program rapid traverse
rates because the rates are preset by parameters. Rapid traverse rates can be overridden by the
feedrate override switch on the machine operator's panel.

4 Constant Surface Speed or Revs Per Minute is selectable on power-up via a parameter.
5 Feed Per Minute or Feed Per Rev is selectable on power-up via a parameter.

11
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G00 moves the tool at a rapid traverse rate to a position in the work coordinate system for both
incremental and absolute commands.

Format: G00 ~-;

where ~- is: a combination of optional axis address (of X or Z) as X-Z...

where ; is: End of block (CR for EIA ASCII code)

This manual uses this notation hereinafter.

The programmed feed remains in the feedrate register and can be activated by canceling the G00
command with a G01 command. The motions of all axes in G00 mode will be interpolated with
all axes reaching the end point simultaneously.

Note 1: The rapid traverse rate in the G00 command is set for each axis independently by the
machine tool builder. Accordingly, the rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the
address F. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end of a block.
Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming the in-position. "In-position"
means that the axis position is within a specified range. (This range is determined by
the machine tool builder.)

G00 mode automatically accelerates and decelerates in a linear fashion allowing the
controlled axis to start and stop smoothly. The rate of accel/decel can be changed by
the machine tool builder.

12
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Linear interpolation (G01)

G01 ~___F___;

This command actuates the linear interpolation mode. The value of ~ defines the distance the
tool will travel. The feedrate is set to a cutting feed by the F code and is modal. An example
follows:

G01 X1.9 Z.1 F20 ;

The feedrate specified by the F code is the vector rate along the path, not the rate of each axis.

Note: There are two feed modes: Feed per Minute, and Feed per Rev.

Polar definition of a line

A polar line is specified by a polar radius/length (R), an angle (AB), and a polar center (AA or I,
K, or XC, ZC).

The 3 o'clock position is always 0 degrees. Positive

angles result in CCW rotation of the polar radius,
while negative angles result in CW rotation of the
polar radius. Polar lines can be used when
estimating lengths during trig help.

If the polar radius/length (R) or angle (AB) is not specified, then the previous values will be
used. If the polar center is not specified then it is taken to be the current machine position.

13
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Some examples of polar programming:

Cutting Feedrate G01, G02, G03 Mode

The feedrate of linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) are commanded
with numbers after the F code.

The F command can appear anywhere in a block and specifies the rate of motion in inches or
millimeters per minute, or inches or millimeters per rev.

14
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Tangential Feedrate Control

The cutting feed is controlled so that speed along the path is always the commanded feedrate.

Feedrate Override

The feed can be overridden using this switch on the machine operator's panel by 0 to 140% (per
every 10%). Feedrate override cannot be applied to functions in which override is inhibited (e.g.
tapping cycle, threading).

Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

The general command format to move along a circular arc is as follows:

Data to be given Command Meaning

G02 Clockwise (CW)
1 Direction of rotation
G03 Counter-clockwise (CCW)
Radius and absolute R, XC and/or The radius and signed absolute coordinates
center ZC of the arc center
Radius and start angle Angle from radius and the center to the start
R and AA
point
2 Distance from start point The signed distance from start point to center
I and/or K
to center R=√ (I2+K2)
Arc radius (if no center is specified a center
Radius Only R is calculated from the start point and end
point) (-R is the longer arc)
End point G93 mode X and or Z End point position in work coordinate system
position G91 mode X and or Z Distance from start point to end point
Radius and angle from the center to the end
3 Radius and end angle R and AB
point
Radius and incremental Radius and distance from the start point to
R, W and or U
end point the end point
4 Feedrate F Velocity along arc

15
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Clockwise and Counterclockwise Directions

Describing an Arc Center
The end point of an arc is specified by address X and Z, and is expressed as an absolute or
incremental value depending on G93 or G91. In incremental the coordinate of the end point is
related to the start point of the arc. The incremental arc center can also be defined by I and K for
the X and Z axes. The numerical value following I, or K is the distance from the start point to the
arc center in X and Z axes. I and K are always incremental values independent of G93 and G91.

The sign of I and K depends on the relationship of the center to the start point as shown below:

Programming with Circular Interpolation

Describing an Arc Using a Radius and No Center

When describing an arc using a radius value there are a number of valid formats. The various
command formats are as follows:

G02 X____ Z____ R____

Or (or –R)
G03 X____ Z____ R____

Arc End Points

The radius is always specified as its true value. The end points are incremental or absolute
depending on G93 and G91. If a radius is used without a center point there are two types of arcs

16
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

that can be generated. One is less than 180º, and the other is greater than 180º, as shown in the
figure that follows. When the arc exceeds 180º * the radius must be specified as a negative value.

Examples:

For arc 1 (less than 180º)

G2 X4 Z6 R5 F30

For arc 2 (greater than 180º)*

G2 X4 Z6 R-5 F30

Describing an Arc Using Absolute Center and Trig Help

G02 X___ Z___ XC___ ZC___ R___
or
G03 X___ Z___ XC___ ZC___ R___

End Point Center Point Radius

Trig Help will allow the programmer to estimate both the start and end points of any arc. The
control will calculate the true start and end points based on the moves preceding and trailing the
arc. Where there are two possible correct answers, the control will choose the point closest to the
estimated point. If the slope of the line entering or leaving the arc is such that no intersection
occurs, the line will be made tangent to the arc.

* Note: Arcs greater than 180º are rare in lathe applications.

17
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

EXAMPLES OF TRIG HELP

Program 1

Programmed Path

G1 X1 Z0
X5 Z-2 (estimated start point)
G3 R2 XC1 ZC-3 X5 Z-4 (estimated end point)
G1 X1 Z-6

Path Generated by Program 1

18
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Program 2

Programmed Path

G1 X1 Z0
X3 Z-1.5 (estimated start point)
G3 R2 XC1 ZC-3 X3 Z-5 (estimated end point)
G1 X3 Z-6

Path Generated by Program 2

19
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Program 3

Programmed Path

G1 X1 Z0
X10 Z-4.5 (estimated start point)
G3 R2 XC5 ZC-3 X7 Z-5 (estimated end point)
G1 X7 Z-6

Path Generated by Program 3

20
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

In general, when dealing with lines and arcs, if the line is programmed short of the arc it will be
extended to the arc. If the line is programmed past the arc it will be shortened to the arc, and if
the line does not intersect the arc it will be made tangent.

Program 4

Programmed Path

G1 X1 Z0
X10 Z-2 (estimated start point)
G3 R2 XC5 ZC-3 X5 Z-5 (estimated end point)
G3 R1.5 XC4 ZC-6 X6 Z-7.5
G1 X6 Z-8.5

Path Generated By Program 4

21
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Program 5

Programmed Path

G1 X1 Z0
X5 Z-2.25 (Estimated Start Point)
G2 R1.5 XC5 ZC-3 X4 Z-4.5 (Estimated End Point)
G2 R2 XC6 ZC-6 X4 Z-7.5 (Estimated End Point)
G1 X4 Z-8.5

Path Generated by Program 5

Things To Remember When Estimating Points

• Estimating can be used with line to arc, arc to arc, and arc to line paths.
• The center and radius of arcs cannot be estimated.
• For line to arc and arc to line, the start and end point estimates must lie on the line;
i.e. the slopes of the lines entering or leaving the arc must be correct.

22
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

• If a line intersects an arc at two points, the estimated point should be closer to the
desired point of intersection.
• If the above conditions are met there is no limit on how far the estimated point is
away from the correct point.
• When estimating the intersection of one arc to another arc, the easiest point to pick on
an arc end point is at one of the quadrant points (0º, 90º, 180º, or 270º).

Describing an Arc Using Polar Definitions

The polar definitions do not change from absolute to incremental. The center of the arc is always
considered the pole and all angles are related to it. The basic polar definition is as follows:

G2
or AA_____ AB_____ R_____
G3 start angle end angle radius

23
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Polar Arc Definitions

The polar format for arcs can be mixed with the Cartesian formats. The following are
legal formats.

G2 X_____ Z_____ AA_____ R_____

end point start angle
G2 AB_____ XC_____ ZC_____ R_____
end angle center point
G2 I_____ K_____ AB_____
center point end angle

Trig Help is only valid in polar when using an arc with valid center point and radius.

24
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Program 6

The following programs will all produce the same part, and which programming method is used
is totally optional.

1) Absolute coordinates (Polar No Trig Help)

G0 X8 Z0
G1 F100 R2.3345 AB225
G2 R1 AA342.496 AB183.441
G3 R2 AA52.655 AB118.234
G1 R1.7507 AB135

2) Absolute coordinates (Polar Trig Help)

G0 X8 Z0
G1 F100 R1 AB225
G2 R1 XC5.3 ZC-2.6045 AB180
G3 R2 XC2 ZC-4.8159 AB120
G1 X8 Z-7 BACK C0 W135

Note: When using Trig Help you must have a valid arc center and radius.

25
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

3) Absolute coordinates (Cartesian No Trig Help)

G0 X8 Z0
G1 X4.6985 Z-1.6508
G2 R1 XC5.3 ZC-2.6045 X5.18 Z-3.6027
(OR) (G2 I.30075 K-.9537 X5.18 Z-3.6027)
(OR) (G2 R1 X5.18 Z-3.6027)
G3 R2 XC2 ZC-4.8159 X5.5241 Z-5.7621
G1 X8 Z-7

4) Absolute coordinates (Cartesian Trig Help)

G0 X8 Z0
G1 X5 Z-1.5
G2 R1 XC5.3 ZC-2.6045 X5 Z-3
G3 R2 XC2 ZC-4.8159 X4 Z-5
G1 X8 Z-7

5) Incremental coordinates

G0 X8 Z0
G1 U-3.3015 W-1.6508
G2 I.30075 K-.9537 U.4815 W1.9519
G3 I-1.59 K-1.2132 U.3441 W-2.1593
G1 U2.4759 W-1.238

Note: In Incremental, Trig Help cannot be used as each point is related to the current position.

Trig Help can be shut off by setting bit 2 of the special flags parameter. This may be
desirable for programs generated from some Cad/Cam systems.

Corner rounding
By adding ,R___ to the end of blocks
commanding linear or circular interpolation,
corner rounding can be automatically inserted.

(1) G91 G01 X0 Z0

(2) Z1, R.25
(3) X2 Z2

26
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Angle chamfering
By adding ,C___ to the end of blocks
commanding linear interpolation, angle
chamfering is automatically inserted.

(1) G91 G01 X0 Z0

(2) Z1, C.25
(3) X2 Z2

Back line
The back line function can be used on any line command. This function reverses the direction of
a programmed line. It would normally be used when you know the end point of the line and not
its start point. The end point would be programmed and the line would be extended backwards to
the start point. When using this function all Trig Help functions are still valid.

Example 1:

(1) X4 Z0
(2) X3 Z-1
(3) G2 R1 ZC-2 AB270
(4) G1 X4 Z-4 BACK C0 W145

Back extend line backwards from (4,-4)

C0 use the arc intersection closest to (4,-4)
W145 extend the line from (4,-4) at an angle of 145º

27
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Example 2:

(1) X4 Z0
(2) X3 Z-1
(3) G2 R1 ZC-2 AB270
(4) G1 X4 Z-4 BACK C2 W145

C2 use the arc intersection farthest from (4,-4)

28
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Example 3:

(1) X4 Z0
(2) X3 Z-1
(3) X2 Z-1.5
(4) X4 Z-4 BACK C0
(or C2) W-35

This example used a back line between two lines to program an unknown point.

Other Notes on Circular and Linear Turning

The feedrate in circular and linear is equal to the feedrate specified by the F code. This feedrate
is the tangential feedrate along the arc and the vector feed on the linear moves.

Note 1: I0 and K0 can be omitted.

Note 2: If X and Z are omitted, or if the end point of an arc is located at the same position as the
start point, and the center is commanded by I and K, an arc of 360º (a complete circle)
is assumed.

G02I _____; (a complete circle)

When only R is used, an arc of 0º is programmed.

G02R _____; (The cutter does not move.)

29
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Note 3: The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is 2% or less.
However, this feedrate is measured along the arc after the cutter compensation is
applied.

Note 4: If I, K and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes
precedence and the others are ignored.

Note 5: The X Z I K R AA AB commands are retained by the control. If an interpolation block is

left incomplete, the missing axis information will be defaulted to the value previously
entered.

Dwell command (G04)

The G4 code must be immediately followed by an FXXX.X instruction. This instruction will
then cause the program to stop or dwell for XXX.X seconds.

General Format

G4F2.5 will cause the program to dwell for 2.5 seconds.

G4F25 will cause the program to dwell for 25 seconds.

Note: A P or an X can be used in place of an F following the G4 command.

Exact stop (G09)

Moves commanded in blocks with G09 decelerate at the end point, and in-position check is
performed. This function is used when sharp edges are required for work piece corners in cutting
feed.

Set data on/off (G10, G11)

This function allows all the CNC's configuration, setup, axis and offset table parameters to be
loaded via a program rather than through the front panel. (This function is the only way to
change parameters 700 and higher from a program.) The format for loading the parameters is as
follows:

G10 Set data On

P*** = value
P*** = value P*** = parameter number
P*** = value to be loaded
P*** = value
G11 Set data Off

When the G11 is performed, the CNC will start using the new parameter settings. Refer to the
APPENDIX for information on parameter assignments.

30
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Clear floating zero (G12)

This function will zero out the floating zero's. See G50 in Section Two, page 47 for setting
floating zero's.

Back / Front Programming (G13 / G14)

The control can be setup so the X+ is either towards that operator or away from the operator.
Machines that have a tool holder on the front side of the spindle are normally configured with
X+ being towards the operator and machines that have a tool holder on the back side of the
spindle are normally configured with X- being towards the operator. The parameter used to
define this orientation is the POWER parameter “Front Turret”. When set to “Yes” the tool is
shown coming from the bottom on the graphics screen. It also relates the tool types in the tool
table as coming from the bottom. A G13 can be used to specify back side programming or a G14
for front side programming.

When programming from the front verses from the back there are 3 differences:
1) G2/G3 or Clockwise/Counterclockwise arcs
2) G41/G42 or Left/Right cutter comp
3) The polar lines and arcs angles are different

31
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES
End Angle G2
170° 200° Clockwise

G42
Right Comp.

Start Angle
270°

Start Angle
90°

G41
Left Comp.
190° End angle G3
160° Counterclockwise

It is possible to mix programming between front and back from one program to another, but it
may cause confusion. Also note that all the examples in the manual are written using back side
programming.

Inch dimensioning mode (modal) (G20)

This function will cause the system to go into the inch mode. In this mode the system will accept
dimensions in inches. This function can be initiated in a program or in MDI.

Active power up is selectable. See power parameter initial units.

G20 cancels G21.

Metric dimensioning mode (modal) (G21)

This function will cause the system to go into the metric mode. In this mode the system will
accept dimensions in millimeters (mm). This function can be initiated in MDI or program mode.
In metric the actual machine position may not exactly agree with the program position because
of the conversion. Feedrate in the metric mode is in millimeters per minute (mmpm), or
millimeters per revolution (mmpr).

Notes: The CNC does a conversion from metric to inch, and inch to metric, on all tool offsets.
This means that a 1.0 inch offset entered in the inch mode will change to 25.4 mm when the
system is switched to metric. The opposite happens when switching from metric to inch mode.

32
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Safe zone off/on (G22, G23)

This control is equipped with a programmable safe zone. Any area of the machine's travels can
be designated as a safe zone. This is an area of the travels the machine cannot enter. If the
machine is programmed into this area when the safe zone check is enabled, an “attempt to move
into safe zone” error will be displayed. The safe zone is defined in the coordinate parameters
(Refer to Section Five, page 164 on parameters). The check is turned off with a G22 and on with
a G23. The normal state of this check is off. Active on power-up is selectable.

Reference point return (G28, G29, G30)

These commands allow the machine to be commanded to a fixed point (reference point) by first
passing through an intermediate point on the way to the reference point. First a fixed reference
point in XZ is entered via the front panel into the reference point parameters. The reference point
is relative to machine zero. Once this point is established it will remain unchanged until changed
by another front panel command. Each time a G28 or G30 is commanded it will return the
machine to the designated reference point. Positioning to the intermediate end reference points
are done in rapid traverse. If a G28 or G30 is executed with no axis definitions it has no effect. If
only one axis is commanded as an intermediate point, only the commanded axis will move to its
intermediate point and reference point. Once an intermediate point is programmed it will be
remembered until the next G28 is executed (i.e. for use in a G29).

The command format is as follows:

Reference point set at X-10 Z-0.1

G28 (no movement)

X1 Z-2 (X1 Z-2)
G28 X3 (X3 Z-2 then X-10 relative to machine zero)
X-3 Z-8
G28 Z-7 (X-3 Z-7 then Z-0.1 relative to machine zero)
G29 Z to -7

The G29 command is just the converse of a G28. The G29 will return the machine to the pro-
grammed point via the last intermediate point stored by a G28 command. The command format
is as follows:
G29 X____ Z____
programmed point

In general G28 is used for a tool change or part loading/unloading position. It is normally used to
move to the reference point only. Example: G91 G28 Z0 or G28 W0, Z moves to reference
point.

When G29 is executed by itself, only the axis that was commanded with the previous G28/G30
goes to the intermediate point.

33
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Example of G28 and G29

X2 Z1 Point A
G28 X4 Z3 Point B then Point R
G29 X3 Z6 Point B then Point C

G30 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point Return

This function works in an identical manner to the G28 reference point return except that a 2nd,
3rd and 4th reference point can be called. The command format is as follows:

G30 P2 X____ Z____

G30 P3 X____ Z____
G30 P4 X____ Z____
reference intermediate
point point

In no P is specified, P2 is assumed. P<1 and P>5 are illegal and will result in an error 542 “G30
illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block”.

Threading (G32, G34-G36)

G32 and G34 through G36 codes on a block with an axis move will force a threading cut to be
made. Threading cuts wait for the spindle marker, then move at the programmed feed per
revolution feedrate. The axis move can be in the G1 (linear mode) or G2/G3 (circular mode).

34
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Return to initial level or to R level (G38/G39)

These two G codes are only used when the control is in one of the Drilling, Tapping or Grooving
cycles (G74, G75/G81 thru G89). A G38 or G39 can be executed anywhere in a program or sub-
routine. A G38 will cause a canned cycle to return the axis to the same level it was at when the
cycle was activated. A G39 will cause a canned cycle to return the axis to the clearance.

G0 X0 Z1
G39
G81 Z-1 R.1 F.01 < Returns to Z.1

G0 X0 Z1
G38
G81 Z-1 R.1 F.01 < Returns to Z1

Cutter compensation (G40, G41, G42)

G40 Compensation Off
G41 Left Compensation
G42 Right Compensation

This section will explain how the cutter compensation works and give pointers on how to use it
optimally.

Cutter compensation is the displacement of the tool path, perpendicular to the programmed path,
by the amount equal to the cutter radius. The programmed path can be figured by the
programmer for a zero tool radius.

If the parts program is written for a zero tool radius, i.e., directly off the print, then by entering
the actual tool radius into the system and activating cutter compensation the operator can make
the control calculate the displaced path.

35
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

The above illustration shows the path taken by the tool without tool nose radius compensation.
The imaginary tool tip follows the programmed path.

The imaginary tool tip does not actually

exist. When position moves are
commanded without tool nose
compensation, the imaginary tool tip is
positioned at the commanded position.
The imaginary tool tip is defined by the
tool length offsets.

The direction of the imaginary tool tip is defined by the type

of tool being used. This direction is defined by the tool type in
the tool table.

36
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

The ten different tool types are shown below.

Note: The above tool displays are for systems with the front turret parameter set to no.

Below is a partial list of tools used for each type:

0. Tool Type #0
*
*
*
1. Tool Type #1
* Inside Turning (chuck toward tail stock)
*
*
2. Tool Type #2
* Inside Turning (tail stock towards chuck)

37
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

*
*

3. Tool Type #3
* Turning (tail stock towards chuck)
*
*
4. Tool Type #4
* Turning (chuck towards tail stock)
*
*
5. Tool Type #5
*
*
*
6. Tool Type #6 and Inside Threading Tools
* Inside Turning Using a Diamond Insert
*
* Boring Tools using Diamond Insert
7. Tool Type #7
* Drills
* Tools for Face Grooving
* Facing Tools
8. Tool Type #8 and Threading Tool
* Turning Using Diamond Insert
* Cut Off Tools
* Tools for Diameter Grooving
9. Tool Type #9
*
*
*

When tools are called using the "T" code, the format used is T####. The first two digits specify
the Tool #; the last two digits specify the tool length offsets, tool tip radius and the tool type.

38
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G40 Cancel tool nose compensation

G41 Tool nose radius compensation on, moving on the left side of the programmed path.
G42 Tool nose radius compensation on, moving on the right side of the programmed path.

For Tool Types 1-8: For Tool Types 0 & 9:

The block that turns cutter comp on (to G41 or G42) from cutter comp off (G40) is the start-up
block. Special care should be taken to assure that the start block positions the tool to make the
subsequent cut.

39
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Figure 1 shows the cutter comp is not active until the G42
X.5 Z-.5 block is completed.

Figure 2 shows a problem on the G42 X.15 block. The

desired position at the face of the part is not obtained.

Figure 3 shows an approach that obtains the desired part.

The block that turns tool nose radius compensation off (from G41 or G42 to G40) is called the
offset cancel block. The imaginary tool tip will be positioned at the end of the offset cancel
block.

40
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

In many cases retracting perpendicular to the part will obtain accurate cutting.

Throughout the program the control keeps a record of the previous programmed point, the
current programmed point, and the next programmed point along the tool path.

41
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

With three points, information on how they are connected, the cutter radius, and whether it is a
left or a right compensation, the control can calculate the current compensated point. The control
will also employ its Trig Help function discussed earlier to connect lines and arcs during cutter
compensation. (See section on Trig Help.)

After each successful calculation of a compensated point the current programmed point becomes
the previous programmed point, the next programmed point becomes the current programmed
point and a new programmed point is read up to become the next programmed point. This
mechanism is repeated over and over again until the end of the program is reached. This
sequence should be understood clearly in order to understand many points that will come up later
on how the compensation works.

The compensation in this control is truly intersectional. Given these three points, the control
calculates the intersection of the compensated path between the previous and the current
programmed points and the compensated path between the current and the next programmed
points. These paths can be a mixture of straight lines and arcs.

Because of the intersectional nature of the compensation package, there has to be an intersection
of all the displaced paths for the system to work. If there is no intersection between two paths the
control will give an error.

Explanation of How Displaced Tool Paths

Cannot Have an Intersection

The solution of the above part is to introduce a 00.0001" chamfer or round corner at the point
between the non-intersecting surfaces.

42
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Non-movement (G65)
Starting and Ending Cutter Compensation

The G65 code placed on a line with coordinates will cause these coordinates to be used for cutter
compensation points but skipped during machine movement.

G65 X___ Z___ Machine will not move to the XZ coordinates

The G65 will allow the programmer to turn cutter compensation on and get the tool to start
cutting or retract at a specific point without doing any extra moves.

43
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Lead in or lead outs can be obtained using the G65 non-move block to obtain cuts where other
surfaces must be avoided.

G65 can also be used for calling a program. The program to be called is specified by the value
of P.

Example: G65 P4371 (calls program #4371)

To pass arguments to the program, other addresses can be added to the block.

Example: G65 P1402 A500 (calls program #1402 and sets parameter #1 to 500 and
parameter #16 to 1402)

The addresses refer to the parameters as follows:

Address Parameter #
A 1
B 2
C 3
. .
. .
X 24
Y 25
Z 26

44
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Notes on G65 P####

Note 1: If the program specified by address P does not exist an error will occur.

Note 2: The program called is the rounded value of address P. Example: G65 P12.75 calls
program #13

Note 3: If no P is in the G65 block, the block is treated as a non-movement block.

Note 4: Addresses not specified are set to -999.

Notes on Cutter Compensation

Note 1: Turning compensation on can be done both in a block with no axis move, or in a block
containing axes moves.

Note 2: There is no restriction on how many successive blocks can have no axis information.

Note 3: There is no restriction on how lines enter and leave arcs. They can have any angle of
intersection as long as an intersection exists.

Note 4: Given the correct centers and radii for two intersecting circles, the system automatically
checks and corrects the programmed point of intersection, i.e. Trig Help.

Note 5: If the programmed point rather than the compensated point is desired, a G40 command
should be added to the block containing that point. The G40 could have been a part of
the previous block, providing that block had no axis information.

Note 6: Similarly, if the point after the desired programmed point is to be compensated, a G41
or G42 should be added to the block containing that next point or to any non-axis
command block between the two.

Note 7: Roughing and finishing passes can be easily made by first entering a tool radius value
larger than the actual measured tool radius by the amount of stock to be left on the part
for the finish pass.

When the program is run, the resultant part will be oversize. Now by entering the actual
cutter radius into the system and running the program once more, the finished part size
will be obtained.

Thus by entering a larger or smaller tool tip radius, the part can be made under or
oversize.

Note 8: In general, when using cutter compensation, no feature on the part can be smaller than
the tool radius. This includes such things as slots, arcs and vees. If a part contains such

45
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

features they should be replaced by straight lines, cutter compensation should be turned
off, or a smaller tool should be used.

Note 9: Cutter compensation can be shut off by setting bit 4 of the special flag parameter.

Note 10: A G41 with a negative tool tip radius is the same as a G42 with a positive tool radius.

Note 11: A G42 with a negative tool tip radius is the same as a G41 with a positive tool radius.

In the above cases the tool will back up as it tries to place itself tangent to the walls of the slots
or v.

This case will give a "Compensated Line/Arc Do Not Intersect" error.

Z to clearance (G45)
The G45 function will retract Z to the clearance position. This position defaults to the last
clearance position but may be changed by editing parameter 140 or set in drilling cycles with the
"R" parameter.

X to Clearance (G46)
The G46 function will retract X to the clearance position. This position defaults to the last
clearance position but may be changed by editing parameter 139 or set in canned cycles.

46
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Z to tool change (G47)

The G47 function will retract Z to the tool change position. This position is set by the machine
tool builder but may be changed by editing the tool change coordinate parameters.

X to tool change (G48)

The G48 function will retract X to the tool change position. This position is set by the machine
tool builder but may be changed by editing the tool change coordinate parameters.

Tool length offsets cancel (G49)

Tool length offsets are zeroed by using the G49 command.

The last two digits of the tool code ("T") are used to load the offsets. T0315 loads tool #3 and
offsets (X length, Z length, tool nose radius, tool type, X wear length, Z wear length and tool
nose wear radius) from the tool table and wear offset table for tool #15.

* Normally the tool # and the tool offset # are the same.

* Offsets 0 are all zero.

* Legal tool #'s and offset #'s are 0 thru 24.

Coordinate Systems
The machine zero is a fixed point on the machine. The machine zero point is normally decided
by the machine tool builder and set by a limit switch and encoder marker pulse on each axis.

Work offsets are normally used for Z axis only. Tool offsets are used for offsetting X axis.

The machine zero point is established when the home command is first executed.

Once the machine zero point is established it is not changed by reset, coordinate system call
(G54-G59), coordinate system shift (G50) or local coordinate system setting (G52).

Software limits are set from the machine zero point.

Floating zero (G50)

G50 is used to establish a work coordinate system. It is also used to set a maximum spindle
speed (to clamp the spindle RPM used with constant surface speed).

G50 X___ Z___ creates a work coordinate system with the 0,0 at the specified distance from the
tool tip. The X value is a diameter value.

Example 1: Move the tool tip to the front edge of a 3" diameter bar, then command G50, X3,
Z0. Then, regardless of the displayed position, a new work coordinate system is
established where the center of the part is X0 and the face of the part is Z0.

47
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Example 2:

If the machine is positioned at P2, which is a command of X4 Z2, and then a G50 X0 Z0 is
commanded, the next time X2 Z.1 is commanded the machine will position to P3; or if the
machine is positioned at P1 and G50 X-4 Z-2 is commanded, the next time X2 Z.1 is
commanded the machine will position to P3.

Note: 1. G50 should not be commanded when cutter compensation is active; the control
should always be in G40 mode.

2. The distance shifted via a G50 in one work coordinate system will be applied to
other work coordinate systems when they are activated via G54 - G59 commands.
If this is not desirable, then a new G50 must be set when changing coordinate
systems. G50 offsets are zeroed on power up and after homing the machine.

3. On power up the G54 coordinate system is active.

4. See the section on G96 (constant surface speed) for information on using G50 to
set the maximum spindle speed.

5: The chuck can be assumed Z0, but all examples in the manual assume the face of
the part as Z0.

6: G50's within a program are active during the program. However, when a
program ends, the work offset that was active when the program started will be
restored.

7: G50's within subprograms or subroutines will be active in the subprograms or

subroutines only. When a subprogram or subroutine ends (and returns to the

48
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

calling program) the G50's are restored to the values that were active when the
subroutine was called.

8: G50 X___ Y___ can be thought of as call this position X___ Z___.

Example:
G0 X2.1 Z0
G0SUB 1 L4
M30
N1
G50 X2.1 Z0
G1 X1.8
X2 Z-.2
G0 X2.1
Z-.5
Return

Local coordinate system (G52)

The G52 command is similar to the G50 command except that it uses the current coordinate
system zero as its reference point instead of the current machine position.

Notes:
1. A G52 is modal; therefore it will affect all coordinate systems once set.
2. G52 X___ Z___ can be thought of as shift the work coordinates by X___ Z___.
3. To cancel a G52, enter G52 X0 Z0.
4. G52 offsets are not affected by the position of the machine. G50 offsets are affected by
the position of the machine.
5. G52 offsets are zeroed on power up, after homing, after any G50 command, and at the
start of any program.

49
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Machine coordinate system (G53)

A G53 code preceding any XZ move will cause those dimensions to be relative to the machine
zero point.

When no offsets are active:

X0 Z0 move to P3
X2 Z1 move to P1
X0 Z-5 move to P2
G53 X0 Z0 move to P4

A coordinate system used to align the work part dimensions to the machine's programs is called a
work coordinate system. The work coordinate system is set by either of the following methods:

1. using a G50 command

2. using a G52 command
3. using G54 - G59 commands.

50
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Work coordinate systems (G54 - G59)

These work coordinate systems are set via the keyboard. The dimensions of the coordinate zero
point are always relative to the G50 Floating Zero point. To set a work coordinate system, select
"PARMS" on the main menu, then "COORD". The work coordinate menu will come up allowing
you to type in the offset coordinates for each coordinate system. The "Home Position" offsets are
parameters which shift all coordinate systems relative to the Machine Zero Point.

G55 X1 Z1 moves to X1 Z1 in work offset 2

G59 X1 Z1 moves to X1 Z1 in work offset 6
G54 is always the power on coordinate system and is active
upon starting a program

Note #1: G54-G59 offsets are not zeroed on power up or after homing.

Note #2: See Section Five, page 140 for a procedure for setting work and tool length
offsets.

51
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Single direction or one shot rapid positioning (G60)

G60 is a one-shot G code and is used in place of G00.

For accurate positioning without backlash, positioning from one direction is available.

G60 X___ Z___

Notes: 1. The amount of overrun is preset by the machine tool builder.

2. Overrun direction is not affected by mirror imaging.

3. If "G00 unidirectional approach" was set by the machine tool builder, the same
positioning sequence would happen with each G00 move.

Exact stop mode (modal) (G61)

When G61 is commanded, deceleration is applied to the end point of the cutting block and in-
position is performed per block thereafter. G61 is valid until G63 (tapping mode) or G64 (cutting
mode) is commanded.

Tapping mode (modal) (G63)

When G63 is commanded, feedrate override and spindle speed override are ignored (always
regarded as 100%), block mode and feedhold become invalid. G63 is valid until G61 (exact stop
mode) or G64 (cutting mode) is commanded.

Cutting mode (modal) (G64)

G64 is the default at the beginning of each program. When G64 is commanded, deceleration
based on the angle between blocks at the end point of each block thereafter is performed, and
cutting goes on to the next block. This command is valid until G61 (exact stop mode) or G63
(tapping mode) is commanded.

Finish Cycle (G70)

After rough cutting with the G71 rough turning cycle, G72 rough facing cycle or G73 pattern
repeat cycle, the finish cycle can be used to remove the finish stock.

52
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Code used for Finish Cycle:

G0 X##.#### Z##.####

G70 P#### Q####

1. (X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the Finish Cycle.

2. (P) Start Block: Designate the starting block of the Finish Cycle.
3. (Q) End Block: Designates the ending block of the Finish Cycle.

Example Program:

Example program using a rough turning cycle with a finish cycle for the part shown above:

G99 F.01
G50 S2000
G96 S600
M3
M8
G0 X2.1 Z.1
P117=0
G71 P1 Q2 U.015 W0 I.025 K0 R0 V1.975 D.05 (Rough Turning Cycle)
N1 (Start Block)

G42
G0 X1.5394
G1 Z0
G3 R.313 Z-.489 X1.8004 .
G1 X1.3234 Z-.7835 .
G2 R.344 Z-1.2165 X1.3234 (Pattern)
G1 X1.8004 Z-1.511 .

53
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G3 R.313 Z-2 X1.5394 .

G1 R.3 AB180 .
X2
N2 (End Block)

T0202 M6
G99 F.005
G50 S2000
G96 S900
M3
M8
G0 X2.1 Z.1 (Start Point)
G70 P1 Q2 (Finish Cycle)

54
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Rough Turning Cycle (G71)

The rough turning cycle is used to define how to remove the material defined in the geometry
between the start block and the end block.

Rough cutting is done by first cutting parallel to the Z axis down to the pattern leaving the rough
stock. After cutting parallel to the Z axis is completed, a pass is made along the finish pattern
leaving the finish stock.

Code for Rough Turning Cycle:

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
(1) (1)

P117=0
(2)
G71 U##.#### W##.### I##.### K##.#### V##.#### D##.## R##.### P#### Q####
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

N####
(10)
. Commands between the Start Block and the End Block
. define the shape to rough out.
N####
(11)
1. (X,Z) Start Point: X and Z return to the start point at the end of the cycle.
2. Relief (PATTERN The type of relief made at the end of the cutting. P117=0 (PATTERN)
45 DEGS.): will cut along the pattern of the part, P117=1 (45 DEGS.) will retract at
a 45 degree angle before retracting Z for the next cut. If the relief type is
45 DEGS., no pockets are allowed in the pattern (radius dimensions).
3. (U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish diameter dimension allowance in the
X axis.

55
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

4. (W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis.
5. (I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of rough finish allowance in the X axis (radius
dimension).
6. (K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough finish allowance in the Z axis.
7. (V) 1st X Depth: The X depth of the 1st cut in the roughing cycle (diameter dimension). If
this is not entered the 1st cut is at (X start point) + (X finish stock/2) +
(X rough stock) - (cut increment).
8. (D) Cut Increment: Depth of cuts designated without sign. The cutting direction depends on
the direction of the 1st move in the pattern (radius dimension).
9. (R) Clearance: Distance of the 45 degree relief or an additional distance to pull away
after the pattern relief (radius dimensions).
10. (P) Start Block: Designates the start of the geometry to rough. (Any number between 0
and 9999.)
11. (Q) End Block: Designates the end of the geometry to rough. (Any number between 0
and 9999.)

Feed and speeds within the pattern are ignored during the parallel cuts. Feeds and speeds are
effective during the pass along the pattern. Rapid moves within the pattern are effective when
following the finish pattern.

P117<>0 P117=0

56
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

After rough cutting parallel to the Z axis there are two types of relief. 45° relief will rapid away
from the pattern at a 45° angle. Pattern relief follows the pattern and then retracts in the X axis.
A 0 (zero) clearance is allowed in the pattern relief.

P117<>0 P117=0

No pockets are allowed when using the 45° relief.

57
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

There are four types of patterns made by the rough turning cycle. Rough cutting for each of these
four patterns is done parallel to the Z axis. The signs of U, W, I and K are shown for each
pattern.

When there are pockets, the Z rough and finish stocks are normally 0. If Z rough and finish
stocks other than 0 are specified, it may cut beyond the finish pattern.

58
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Note 1: Moves back to the start point from the end of the pattern are rapid moves.

Note 2: If the X end point in the pattern is not equal to the X start point of the pattern, a
shoulder to the X start point will be added.

Note 3: If the X rough stock and the Z rough stock are both zero, the pass made along the
finish pattern is skipped.

59
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Example of Rough Turning Program

G0 X2.1 Z.1 (Start Point)

P117=0 (Use Pattern Relief)
G71 P1 Q2 U0 I.03 K0 R0 V1.95 D.05 (Roughing Information)
N1 (Start Block)
G42
G0 X1.5
G1 Z0
G2 R.5 Z-.5 (Geometry)
G2 R1 Z-1.5
G2 R.5 Z-2
G1 X2
N2 (End Block)

Graphics from Example of Rough Turning Program

60
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Rough Facing Cycle (G72)

The rough facing cycle generates all the roughing tool paths from a specified finish pattern. The
finish pattern is specified by the geometry between the start block and the end block.

Rough cutting is done by first cutting parallel to the X axis down to the pattern leaving the rough
stock. After the cuts along the X axis are completed, a pass is made along the finish pattern
leaving the finish stock.

Feeds and speeds within the pattern are ignored during the parallel cuts. Feeds and speeds are
effective during the pass along the pattern.

Rapid moves within the pattern are effective when following the finish pattern.

Features concerning pattern/45 degree relief, pockets, X stock with pockets, and X axis changing
direction are the same as the rough turning cycle.

61
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Code for Rough Facing Cycle:

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1
P117 = 0
2
G72 U##.#### W##.#### I##.#### K##.#### V##.#### D##.#### R##.#### P#### Q####
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

N####
10
.
. Commands between the start block and the end
. block define the shape to rough out, i.e. Rough-Out.
.
N####
11
1. (X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the roughing cycle. X and Z return to the start point at
the end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.
2. Relief (PATTERN or The type of relief made at the end of the cutting. PATTERN will cut
45 DEGS.): along the pattern of the part; 45 DEGS will retract at a 45 degree angle
before retracting X for the next cut. If the relief type is 45 DEGS no
pockets are allowed in the pattern.
3. (U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the X axis (diameter
dimension).
4. (W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis (radius
dimension).
5. (I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the X axis.
6. (K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the Z axis.
7. (V) 1st Z Depth: The Z depth of the 1st cut in the roughing cycle. If this is not entered
the 1st cut is at (Z start point) + (Z finish stock) + (Z rough stock) - (cut
increment).
8. (D) Cut Increment: Depth of cut designated without sign. The cutting direction depends on
the direction of the 1st move in the pattern.
9. (R) Clearance: Distance of the 45 degree relief or an additional distance to pull away
after the pattern relief.
10. (P) Start Block: Designates the start of the geometry to face. (Any number between 0
and 9999.)
11. (Q) End Block: Designates the end of the geometry to face. (Any number between 0
and 9999.)

Notes: 1. The start block number should not be the same as the ending block number.
2. If the X rough stock and Z rough stock are both zero the pass made along the finish
pattern is skipped.

62
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

These are four patterns made by the rough facing cycle. Rough cutting for each of these patterns
is done parallel to the X axis. The signs of U, W, I and K are shown for each pattern.

63
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Example Rough Facing Cycle Program:

G0 X0 Z.1 (Start Point)

P117=1 (45° Relief)
G72 P1 Q2 U0 W0 I-.02 K.04 R.04 V-.04 D.06 (Roughing Information)
N1 (Start Block)
G42
G0 Z-.7 .
G1 X.5 .
X1 Z-.5, R.05 Geometry
X1.5 .
Z0 .
N2 (End Block)

64
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Graphics From Example of Rough Facing Program

65
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73)

The pattern repeat cycle repeatedly cuts a pattern incrementing the cuts down to the desired size.
This cycle is used to efficiently cut a part whose shape is already defined (forged or cast).

Code for Pattern Repeat Cycle:

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1 1

G73 U##.### W##.#### I##.#### K##.#### D## P#### Q####

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N####
7
. Commands between the Start and End Block define
. the shape to cut.
N####
8

1. (P) Start Block: Designates the start of the geometry to cut. (Any number between 0
and 9999.)
2. (U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the X axis.
3. (W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis.
4. (I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the X axis.
5. (K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the Z axis.
6. (D) Number of Passes: The number of passes to cut the rough stock.
7. (X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the roughing cycle. X and Z return to the start point
at the end of the cycle.

66
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

8. (Q) End Block: Designates the end of the geometry to cut. (Any number between 0
and 9999.)

Note 1: Any feeds or speeds within the pattern are ignored.

Note 2: Rapid moves within the pattern will be executed as rapid moves during the pattern
repeat cycle.

Note 3:Moves back to the start point, from the end of the pattern, are rapid moves.

Example of Repeat Program:

67
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G0 X2.1 Z.1 (Start Point)

G73 P1 Q2 I.095 K0 U0 W0 D4 (Repeat Information)
N1 (Start Block)
G42 .
G0 X1.5 .
G1 Z0 .
G2 R.5 Z-.5 .
G2 R1 Z-1.5 (Pattern)
G2 R.5 Z-2 .
G1 X2
N2 (End Block)

Graphics from Example of Repeat Cycle Program

68
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G76)

The multiple thread cutting cycle is used to make multiple passes on a thread using one of four
different cutting methods.

Code for Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle:

P103 = ##.####
1

P104 = ###.###
2

P130 = ##.####
3

P131 = ##
4

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
5 5

G76 X##.#### Z##.#### I##.#### F.#### Q###.### D##.#### A###.### P# K##.####

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1. Chamfer Length: Length of the chamfer on the end of the thread.

69
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

2. Chamfer Angle: The angle of the chamfer on the end of the thread. Angles 0° thru 90°
will work for all threads, where 0° is straight out and 90° is no chamfer
for a straight thread.

3. Minimum Cut: When the cutting amount is less than the minimum cut, the cutting
amount is clamped at the minimum cut (radius value).

4. Finish Passes: The last pass can be repeated a number of times. If finish passes value
is 0 or 1, the last pass will be made one time.

5. (X,Z) Start Point: The start point of threading cycle. X and Z return to the start point
after each pass on the thread at a rapid feedrate.

6. (X) Root Diameter: The minor diameter for external threads and the major diameter for
internal threads.

7. (Z) End Point: The end of the thread.

8. (I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper to thread.

9. (F) Lead: Lead of the thread.

10. (Q) Shift Angle: Shift angle of the thread start angle. Used for multiple threads, i.e.
shift 180°, 120° etc. 0° thru 360° are allowed.
11. (D) First Cut Amount:Cutting depth of the first cut (radius value).
12. Tool Nose Angle: The read angle of the tool nose.
13. (P) Cutting Method: P1=CONSTANT AMOUNT/1 EDGE
P2=CONSTANT AMOUNT/BOTH EDGES
P3=CONSTANT DEPTH/ONE EDGE
P4=CONSTANT DEPTH/BOTH EDGES

14. (K) Thread Height: Height of the thread (X direction). K is specified as a radius value.

Inside or outside threads are determined by the start point relative to the root diameter.

70
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

The four cutting methods are shown below:

P1: Constant Amount/1 Edge P3: Constant Depth/1 Edge

P2: Constant Amount/Both Edges P4: Constant Depth/Both Edges

71
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

If the cutting depths using constant amount one edge, or constant amount both edges, become
less than the minimum cut, the cutting depths are clamped at the minimum cut.

Cycle 1 (G92)
Cycle 1 is used to make a single threading cut. The cycle rapids to the X cutting depth, makes the
threading cut, retracts X axis and rapids back to the start point. Tapered threads are allowed.
Threads must be cut in feed per revolutions.

Straight Threading Using G92 Cycle 1 With Incremental Dimensions

Tapered Threading Using G92 Cycle 1 With Absolute Dimensions

72
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Code for Cycle 1 Thread Cutting:

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1 1

P103 = ##.####
2

P104 = ###.###
3

G92 I##.#### X##.#### Z##.#### Q###.### F.####

4 5 6 7 8

1. (X,Z) Start Point: The start point of Cycle 1. X and Z return to the start point at the end
of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.
2. Chamfer Length: Length of the chamfer on the end of the thread.
3. Chamfer Angle: The angle of the chamfer on the end of the thread. Angles 0° thru 90°
will work for all threads, where 0° is straight out and 90° is no chamfer
for a straight thread.
4. (I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper to thread (radius value).
5. (X) Diameter: The root diameter to thread.
6. (Z) End Point: The end point of the thread.
5a. (U) Depth: The incremental X distance and direction from the start point to the
diameter to thread. (U can be used in place of X.)
6a. (W) Length: The length and direction of the thread in Z from the start point. (W can be
used in place of Z.)
7. (Q) Start Angle: Shift angle of the thread start angle. Used for multiple threads, i.e. shift
180°, 120° etc. 0° thru 360° is allowed.
8. (F) Lead: Lead of the thread.

73
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

When using G92 Cycle 1 with Incremental Dimensions, the signs of the depth, length and taper
indicate the directions shown in the above figures.

Note: The feedrate override is locked at 100% during threading. The spindle override is active
but should not be changed during thread cutting.

74
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Drilling, Tapping and Grooving

These canned cycles simplify the program by using a single block with a G code to specify the
machining operations usually specified in several blocks.

Operation at
G code Drilling Retraction Application
hole bottom
G74 Intermittent feed - Rapid traverse High speed peck drilling or
Face grooving cycle
G75 Intermittent Feed - Rapid traverse Diameter grooving cycle
G81 Feed - Rapid traverse Drilling cycle, Spot drilling
cycle
G82 Feed Dwell Rapid traverse Drilling cycle, Counter
boring cycle
G83 Intermittent feed - Rapid Peck drilling cycle
G84 Feed Reverse spindle Feed Tapping cycle
G85 Feed - Feed Boring cycle
G86 Feed Spindle stop Rapid Boring cycle
G89 Feed Dwell Feed Boring cycle
Table 3
Canned Cycles

75
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Generally these canned cycles consist of a sequence of six operations as shown below.

Operation 1: Positioning of axes X and Z

Operation 2: Rapid traverse to point R
Operation 3: Hole machining
Operation 4: Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5: Retraction to point R
Operation 6: Rapid traverse up to the initial point

Canned Cycle Operation

Canned cycle operations consist of three basic modes that are specified by particular modal G
codes as shown below.

(1) Data format G93 Absolute

G91 Incremental

(2) Return point level G38 Initial point level

G39 R point level

(3) Drilling mode G74

G75
G81
. See Table 3 on page 75
.
.
G89

Note: The initial level means the position of the Z axis, or X axis for G75 (diameter grooving)
when the canned cycle is turned on.

76
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

The figure below shows how to specify data in G93 or G91 mode.

Absolute and Incremental Programming

If the tool is to be returned to point R or to the initial level, it is specified by G38 or G39. (See
Figure below)

Initial Level and Point R Level

The drilling data is specified following G74/G75/G81 to G89. Data is stored in the control as
modal values and is retained for future use in other cycles.

The machining data in a canned cycle is specified as shown below:

G _____ Z__ R__ V__ Q__ P__ F__ U__ E__ X__ D__ K__ I__

Drilling Mode Drilling Data

Drilling mode G ____ See Table 3 on page 75.

77
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Drilling data Z... Specifies the distance from point R to the bottom of the
hole with an incremental value, or the position of the hole
bottom with an absolute value or the end point for G75
(diameter grooving).
R... Specifies the distance from the initial level to the point R
with an incremental value, the position of point R with an
absolute value.
V... Specifies the first depth in peck and grooving cycles.
Q... Specifies the increment value for peck and grooving cycles.
P... Specifies the dwell time at the bottom of the hole. The time
is specified in seconds.
F... Specifies the plunge feedrate.
U... Peckup increment, unsigned distance to rapid retract in
peck/grooving cycles.
E... Peck Clearance, the unsigned distance to rapid to above the
previous depth.
X... Final diameter of the groove in the face grooving cycle or
final depth in the diameter grooving cycle.
D... Amount of relief to back off before retracting in the
grooving cycle.
K... Z increment, the unsigned amount of step-over in the
diameter grooving.
I... X increment, the unsigned amount of step-over in the face
grooving cycle.

The drilling cycles use:

P116 Cut Increment

P118 Relief
P124 Diameter
P139 X R-Plane
P140 Z R-Plane
P141 Final Depth
P142 Initial Level
P143 Cut Increment
P144 First Depth
P145 Plunge Feedrate
P146 Peckup Increment
P147 Peck Clearance
P148 Dwell

Once the drilling data has been specified in a canned cycle, it is retained until it is changed.

Canned cycles are cancelled at the beginning of each program.

78
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

The position moves must be made to the location of the hole to be drilled, tapped or the start of
the groove before the cycle is called. None of the drill cycles are modal; they are one shot cycles.

Each cycle will detailed next.

Face Grooving/High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G74)

The face grooving cycle can be used as a chip breaking drilling cycle by omitting the X
dimension (X-Final Diameter, I-X Increment and D-Relief) fields out of the G74 blocks. If X
(final diameter) and I (X increment) are omitted, the sign of D (relief) determines its direction.
The fast peck cycle is similar to peck cycle except the fast cycle does not pull out to the
clearance, it pulls out the peck increment. There are four possible patterns going tail stock to
chuck or vice versa, and outside to inside and vice versa.

The sign (or direction) of the Z increment, peck clearance and peck up increment are determined
by the direction of the final Z depth to the initial Z position.

The sign (or direction) of the X increment and relief are determined by the direction of the final
diameter to the initial X position.

79
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

CODE USED FOR THE FACE GROOVING CYCLE

G74 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.#### V##.#### Q##.#### E##.#### U##.#### X##.#### I##.#### D##.#### A##.#### C##.#### H# G4#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1. (F) Feedrate: Z feedrate for grooving the slot.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end
of the cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension
the tool was at before the grooving cycle started.
3. (R)Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the grooving cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to cut the groove to.
5. (V) First Z Depth: First depth. If the 1st depth is omitted the 1st depth is at the clearance
- Z increment.
6. (Q) Z Increment: Unsigned amount to groove in each successive peck.
7. (E) Peck Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid to above the previous depth.
8. (U) Peckup Increment: Unsigned distance to rapid up each peck.
9. (X) Final Diameter: The diameter to cut the groove to. The starting diameter is the X
dimension the tool is at when the grooving cycle started.
10. (I) X Increment: The unsigned amount to step over in diameter. (This is a radius
value.)
11. (D) Relief: Amount to back X away at the bottom of the groove before retracting
to the Z clearance. (This is a radius value.)
12. (A) X Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave on each side of the groove
before making a finish pass. (This is a radius value.)
13. (C) Z Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave on the bottom of the groove
before making a finish pass.
14. (H) 1st Relief If H=0 then X will back away at the bottom of the groove before
retracting Z to the clearance. If H<>0 then X will not retract after the
1st peck to the bottom of the groove.
15. (G4#) Cutter Comp G40, G41, or G42 cutter compensation can be used to obtain the
desired groove size (only valid for tool type 7 and type 5).

Note 1: If both X and Z finish stock are zero, no finish pass is made. If either X or Z finish stock is
non-zero, a finish pass will be made as follows:

1. Remove the X finish stock at the starting diameter to the bottom of the groove.
2. Move to the center of the groove, along the bottom.
3. Retract out of the groove.
4. Move to the starting diameter.
5. Remove the X finish stock at the final diameter to the bottom of the groove.
6. Remove the Z stock along the bottom of the groove to the starting diameter.
7. Retract out of the groove.

Note 2:If cutter compensation is not used when using the Face Grooving Cycle, the dimensions
of the groove must account for tool width.

80
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Note 3:A position should be made prior to the Face Grooving Cycle so the X axis is positioned to
the start of the groove.

Diameter Grooving (G75)

The diameter grooving cycle is similar to the face grooving cycle except that peck cycle is used
on the diameter. If the Z dimensions (Z-End Point, I-Z Increment and D-Relief) are omitted, a
single high speed peck cycle is done on the diameter. There are four possible patterns going tail
stock to chuck or visa versa and outside towards center or visa versa.

The sign (or direction) of the X increment, peck clearance, and peck-up increment are
determined by the direction of the final X depth to the initial X diameter.

The sign (or direction) of the Z increment, and relief are determined by the direction of the Z end
point to the initial Z position. If Z end point and Z increment are omitted, the sign of the relief
determines its direction.

81
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

CODE USED FOR THE DIAMETER GROOVING CYCLE

G75 F.#### G39 R##.#### X##.#### V##.#### Q##.#### E##.#### U##.#### Z##.#### K##.#### D##.#### A##.#### C##.#### H# G4#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1. (F) Feedrate: X feedrate for cutting the groove.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end
of the cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the X dimension
the tool was at before the grooving cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: X rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the grooving cycle. (This
is a diameter value.)
4. (X) Final X Depth: The diameter to cut the groove to.
5. (V) First X Depth: First peck diameter. (If the first depth is omitted, the first depth will
be the clearance - X increment.)
6. (X) X Increment: Unsigned diameter to groove in each successive peck. (This is a
radius value.)
7. (E) Peck Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid up after each peck. (This is a radius
value.)
8. (U) Peckup Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid up after each peck. (This is a radius
value.)
9. (Z) Endpoint: The Z dimension to cut the groove to. The start of the groove is the Z
dimension the tool is at when the grooving cycle is started.
10. (K) Z Increment: The unsigned amount to the step over.
11. (D) Relief: Amount to back Z away at the bottom of the groove before retracting
X to the X clearance.
12. (A) X Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave at the bottom of the groove
before making a finish pass. (This is a radius value.)
13. (C) Z Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave on each side of the groove
before making a finish pass.
st
16. 14. (H) 1 Relief: If H=0 then Z will back away at the bottom of the groove before
retracting X to the clearance. If H<>0 then Z will not retract after the
1st peck to the bottom of the groove.
17. (G4#) Cutter Comp G40, G41, or G42 cutter compensation can be used to obtain the
desired groove size (only valid for tool types 1,2,3,4,6 or 8).

Note 1: If both X and Z finish stock are zero, no finish pass is made. If either X or Z finish stock is
non-zero, a finish pass will be made as follows:

1. Remove the Z finish stock at the final Z dimension to the bottom of the groove.
2. Move to the center of the groove, along the bottom.
3. Retract out of the groove.
4. Move to the Z starting dimension.
5. Remove the Z finish stock at the starting Z dimension to the bottom of the groove.
6. Remove the X stock along the bottom of the groove to the final Z dimension.
7. Retract out of the groove.

82
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Note 2:If cutter compensation is not used in the Diameter Grooving Cycle, the dimensions of the
groove must account for tool width.

Note 3:A position should be made prior to the Diameter Grooving Cycle so that Z is positioned
to the start of the groove.

Drill Cycle (G81)

The drill cycle rapids to the Z clearance plane, feeds to the Z depth and then rapids to the
clearance plane or initial position.

CODE USED FOR THE DRILL CYCLE

G81 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.####

1 2 3 4

1. (F) Feedrate: Z Feedrate for drilling the hole.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end of the
cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension the tool was
at before the drill cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the drill cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to drill the hole to.

83
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Drill Dwell Cycle (G82)

The drill dwell cycle is identical to the drill cycle with the addition of a dwell at the bottom of
the hole.

CODE USED FOR THE DRILL/DWELL CYCLE

G82 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.#### P###.#

1 2 3 4 5

1. (F) Feedrate: Z feedrate for drilling the hole.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end of the
cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension the tool was
at before the drill cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the drill cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to drill the hole at.
5. (P) Dwell: Time in seconds to dwell at the bottom of the hole.

84
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Drill Peck Cycle (G83)

The drill peck cycle is useful for drilling deep holes. It drills to successive depths, then rapids out
of the hole and back to a peck clearance for each depth. The sign or direction of the Z increment
and peck clearance assumes drilling is done from tail stock towards the chuck.

CODE USED FOR THE DRILL PECK

G83 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.#### V##.#### Q##.#### E##.####

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1. (F) Feedrate: Z feedrate for drilling the hole.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end of
the cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension the tool
was at before the drill cycle starts.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids back to the clearance at the beginning of the drill cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to drill the hole to.
5. (V) First Z Depth: First peck depth. If the first Z depth is omitted the first Z depth is the
clearance- the Z increment.
6. (Q) Z Increment: Unsigned amount to drill in each successive peck.
7. (E) Peck Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid to above the
previous depth.

85
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Tap Cycle (G84)

G84 specifies a hard tapping cycle. The tap cycle rapids Z to the clearance, feeds Z to the
reverse depth (in feed per rev), reverses the spindle, and retracts Z to the clearance (in feed per
rev). The tap cycle then reverses the spindle to the original direction. Z axis rapids to the initial
level if initial point return is specified.

CODE USED FOR THE TAP CYCLE

G97 G99 M3 S####.#

G84 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.####
1 2 3 4

1. (F) Lead: Distance between threads.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the
end of the cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z
dimension the tool was at before the tap cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the tap cycle.
4. (Z)Spindle Reverse Depth: The spindle reverses direction at this depth. It may coast some
and cause the tap to go a little deeper.

Note 1: If the spindle is running clockwise when the G84 is initiated, right tapping is done. If the
spindle is running counterclockwise when the G84 is initiated, left tapping is done.
Note 2: The tap cycle will not stop until the end of the tap cycle even if feedhold or block mode
are applied. If halt is applied the tap reverses and stops when it is out of the hole.

86
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Bore Cycle (G85)

The bore cycle feeds to the Z depth and feeds back to the clearance.

CODE GENERATED FROM THE BORE CYCLE

G85 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.####

1 2 3 4

1. (F) Feedrate: Feedrate for boring the hole.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end of the
cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension the tool was
at before the drill cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the bore cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to bore the hole to.

87
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

High Speed Boring Cycle (G86)

The high speed boring cycle will first start the spindle clockwise and then rapid Z to the
clearance. Then it will feed Z to the Z depth, stop the spindle, and rapid to the initial Z if
specified by G38.

CODE USED FOR THE HIGH SPEED BORING CYCLE

G86 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.####

1 2 3 4

1. (F) Feedrate: Feedrate for boring the hole.

2. Return Point: G38 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end of the
cycle. G39 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension the tool was
at before the drill cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the bore cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to bore the hole to.

88
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Bore/Dwell Cycle (G89)

The bore/dwell cycle is the same as the bore cycle, but a dwell is preformed at the bottom of the
hole.

CODE USED FOR THE HIGH SPEED BORING CYCLE

G89 F.#### G39 R##.#### Z##.#### P###.#

1 2 3 4 5

1. (F) Feedrate: Feedrate for boring the hole.

2. Return Point: G39 means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the end of the
cycle. G38 means the tool will rapid back to the Z dimension the tool was
at before the bore/dwell cycle started.
3. (R) Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the bore/dwell cycle.
4. (Z) Final Z Depth: The depth to bore to.
5. (D) Dwell: Time in seconds to dwell at the bottom of the hole.

89
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

NOTES ON CANNED CYCLE SPECIFICATIONS:

Note 1: The spindle must be turned on before a drilling, grooving or tap cycle is specified.

M3 Spindle CW
.
.
.
G __ __ ...... Correct
.
.
.
M5 Spindle Stop
.
.
.
G __ __ ...... Incorrect (M3 or M4 must be specified before this block.)

Note 2:Operator Precautions

a) Single block
When a drilling cycle is performed in the single block mode, the control
stops at the end of Operations 1, 2 and 6 as shown in the figure on page
76. Therefore it must be started at least three times to drill one hole. The
tap cycle will not stop at the bottom of the hole in the single block mode.

b) Feedhold
When a feedhold is applied between Operations 3 to 5 in tap cycle G84,
the FEEDHOLD lamp immediately lights, but the control continues to
operate up to Operation 6 and stops. If a FEEDHOLD is applied during
Operation 6, it immediately stops.

c) Override
The feedrate override and spindle override is locked at 100% during the
operation of canned cycle G84.

90
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Cycle A (G90)
Cycle A is used to make a single turning cut. The cycle rapids to the X cutting depth, makes the
cut, retracts X axis and rapids back to the start point. Tapered cuts are allowed.

Tapered Cutting Using Cycle A With Absolute Dimension

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1 1

G90 I##.#### X##.#### Z##.####

2 3 4

1. (X,Z) Start Point: X and Z return to the start point at rapid feedrate.
2. (I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper.
3. (X) Diameter: The diameter to turn.
4. (Z) End Point: The end point of the cut.

-OR-

91
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Straight Cutting Using Cycle A With Incremental Dimensions

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1 1

G90 U##.#### W##.####

2 3

1. (X, Z) Start Point: X and Z return to the start point at a rapid feedrate.
2. (U) Depth: The incremental X distance and direction from the start point to the
diameter to turn. (U is a diameter value.)
3. (W) Length: The length and direction of the cut in Z from the start point.

92
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

When using Cycle A with incremental dimensions, the signs of the depth, length and taper
indicate the directions shown in the above figures.

93
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Cycle B (G94)
Cycle B is used to make a single facing cut. The cycle rapids to the Z cutting depth, makes the
cut, retracts Z axis and rapids back to the start point. Tapered cuts are allowed.

Tapered Cut For Cycle B Absolute And Incremental Dimensions

When Using Absolute Dimensions

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1 1

G94 K##.#### X##.#### Z##.####

2 3 4

1. (X,Z) Start Point: X and Z return to the start point at a rapid feedrate.
2. (K) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper.
3. (X) Diameter: The diameter to face to.
4. (Z) End Point: The Z end point.

-OR-

When Using Incremental Dimensions

G0 X##.#### Z##.####
1 1

G94 K##.#### U##.#### W##.####

2 3 4

94
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

1. (X,Z) Start Point: X and Z return to the start point at a rapid feedrate.
2. (K) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper.
3. (U) Depth: The incremental X distance and direction from the start point to the
diameter to face to. (Depth is a diameter value.)
4. (W) Length: The amount and direction of the taper to face.

When using Cycle B with incremental dimensions, the signs of the depth, length and taper
indicate the direction shown in the figures above.

Incremental mode (G91)

This function causes the control to go into the incremental mode. In this mode all dimensions are
entered relative to the machine position in the previous block. In the case of MDI, the
dimensions are relative to the current machine position. Dimensions in G91 can be either
positive or negative. Care should be taken when using G91. Whenever activating tool offsets, or
setting "Floating Zeroes" via G50, the control should not be in the G93 (absolute) mode.

XC, ZC (centers), AA (start angle) and AB (end angle) are always an absolute.

95
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G91 cancels G93.

(P1) G93 X8 Z0
(P2) G91 X-4 Z-1
(P3) Z-1

Incremental positioning can also be

commanded using address U for X axis and
W for Z axis.

(P1) G93 X8 Z0
(P2) U-4 W-1
(P3) W-1

Absolute mode (G93)

This function causes the control to go into its normal Absolute operating mode. In this mode all
dimensions are referenced from a single reference point. This reference can either be the "Home
Zero" point which is a fixed point on the machine, or an operator defined work coordinate point.

G93 is active at the beginning of each program. G93

cancels G91.

(P1) G93 X8 Z0
(P2) X4 Z-1
(P3) Z-2

Dimensions relative to work coordinates can

be either negative or positive depending on
where the operator sets the zero coordinate.

Constant Surface Speed (CSS) (G96)

The surface speed (of the tool relative to the work piece) can be controlled by G96 (constant
surface speed). Using this code will cause the spindle to rotate faster as the tool moves closer to
the center of the work (X=0) and slower as the tool moves further from the center of the work
(larger diameters). G96 S#### specifies the speed in feet/minute (in inch mode) or meters/minute
(in metric mode). G97 (revolution per minute) cancels G96.

96
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

To calculate the spindle speed at a diameter use:

Spindle RPM's = (Constant Surface Speed) (12) (Inches)

(π) (Diameter)

OR

Spindle RPM's = (Constant Surface Speed) (1000) (Metric)

(π) (Diameter)

Notes: 1. In G0 (Rapid Mode) moves, the surface speed is calculated on the target position
of the move, not on the actual position during the move.

2: To clamp the spindle speed (as the tool moves toward smaller diameters), use
G50 S#### (#### is in RPM's). The maximum spindle speed is only effective in
G96 (constant surface mode).

0.1 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) (G97)

G97 S#### commands the spindle to run at #### RPM's (with the spindle speed override at
100%) regardless of the tool position. G96 (constant surface speed) cancels G97.

Notes 1: The spindle override allows percentages of the programmed spindle speed to be
applied at percentages of 0%, 10%, 20% thru 130% and 175%.

2: When switching from G97 to G96 or G96 to G97 the previous commanded speed
for the new mode (G96 or G97) will be in effect.

Feed Per Minute (G98)

With G98 active the feedrates are commanded by the value of F####.#. Units are specified in
inches per minute (in inch mode) or millimeters per minute (in metric mode). G99 (feed per
revolution) cancels G98.

Feed per Revolution (G99)

With G99 active the feeds are specified by distance per revolution of the spindle (i.e. the faster
the spindle spins, the faster the tool moves). G99 F.#### specifies the distance per revolution in
inches per revolution (inch mode) or millimeters per revolution (metric mode).

Note 1:The feedrate override allows percentages of the programmed feedrate to be applied at
percentages of 0%, 10%, 20%, thru 140%.

Note 2: When G0 (rapid position) moves are commanded the programmed feedrates are not
considered.

97
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Cancel mirror image (G501), Set mirror image (G511)

The mirror image commands allow mirroring about any centerline. The mirror image centerline
is not affected by either scaling or rotation being on or off.

The command is as follows: G511 X____ Z____

X and Z are the axes to mirror and the distance from the current coordinate zero to create the
mirror centerline. There must be at least one X or Z after the G511 command.

Original Path G0 X.5 Z0

G1 Z-.4
X-1.5 Z-1
Z-1.5R.1
X2
Z-2

G501 cancels mirror image.

Mirroring an axis is similar to scaling by -1 except that cutter compensation works on mirroring,
and scaling by -1 doesn't.

Cancel scaling (G550), Set scaling (G551)

Scaling can be commanded at any time during a program by using the G551 command.

Command format: G551 I____ K____ X____ Z____

I and K are the scaling center. If I and K are not specified in the G551 line, the scaling center
will default to the last center used. The scaling center is set to 0, at the start of each program and
after a G550.

X and Z are the scale factors for each axis. The range of each scale factor is ±999.9999 to
±000.0001. The scale factors, once set, remain in effect until changed or cancelled by a G550. At
the start of each program all scale factors are set to 1.

98
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Notes on Scaling

1. Once set, scaling remains in effect until cancelled by a G550.

2. If arcs are being scaled, the Z axis scale factors are used to scale the radius.
3. G28, G29, G30 and G50 are not affected by the scale factors.
4. To scale all axes to the same scale factor you can use G551 P.
5. G550 sets scale factors to 1 and scaling centers to 0.

Coordinate system rotation (G568 - G569)

G568 can be used to rotate a programmed shape about a predefined center point. The center of
rotation is defined by I and K, and the angle of rotation by AA. The command format is as
follows:

G568 AA+_____ I____ K____

AA+ is CCW
AA- is CW

I and K values specify the center of rotation. The center of rotation defaults to the current
coordinate system zero point at the beginning of each program. If the IK's are not present in the
G568 block the center of rotation will be the last center specified.

99
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G569 zeroes the rotation angle and rotation center.

Care needs to be taken when using rotation in conjunction with other functions. Functions such
as mirror image, scaling and cutter compensation need to be thought about carefully when used
together with rotations. Some of the basic rules are as follows:

1. Cutter compensation should be off (G40) when rotation is called.

2. If scaling is on before rotation, the rotation center will be scaled; if rotation is called
before scaling, the rotation center will not be scaled.

3. The order of on and off is first on last off.

G551 . . . . scaling on
G568 . . . . rotation on
G41 . . . . cutter compensation on
.
.
.
G40 . . . . cutter compensation off
G569 . . . . rotation off
G550 . . . . scaling off

4. If the rotational center is scaled it will remain scaled until replaced by a new center or
cancelled with G569.

5. X and Z can be used instead of I and K for rotation center.

100
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

6. R can be used instead of AA for rotation angle.

Part Scaled Then Rotated: G551 I0 K-1 X.5 Z.5

G568 X2 Z0 AA20
X.5 Z0
Z-.4
X1.5 Z-1
Z-1.5
X2

Part Rotated Then Scaled: G568 X2 Z0 AA20

G551 I0 K-1 X.5 Z.5
X.5 Z0
Z-.4
X1.5 Z-1
Z-1.5
X2

A discussion follows on several specialized and non-standard G codes.

G990/G991 Store Restore Parameters

Pp L1 Qq G990 (store parameters)
Pp L1 Qq G991 (restore parameters)

101
SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

G990/991 allow parameters to be saved and restored using file names C:\RAM\Q0000-Q9999.

Parameters are:
Pp (base parameter number, default 0),
L1 (number of parameters, default 10),
Qq (file identification, default 0).

The G990 or G991 MUST follow the Pp, L1 or Qq.

CAUTION: Have no other commands on the line.

Example:
N0020 (My subroutines)
P0 L10 Q20 G990 (Save P0-P9)

P0 = ... (freely use and modify P0-P9)

P0 L10 Q20 G991 (restore P0-P9)
M98 (return to caller with original P0-P9)

Read byte parameter (G995)

P1=b G995 (sets P0 to value of byte b)

Example:
P1=209
G995 (sets P0 to value of byte 209, Spindle DAC value)
Valid P1 values are 0 to 639.
Note: P0=PB209 could be used instead of G995.

Write byte parameter (G996)

P1=b P0=V sets byte parameter b to value v

Example:
P1=50
P0=1
G996 (set byte parameter #50, Spindle Range
Valid P1 values are 0 to 639
Valid P0 values are 0 to 255
Note 1: PB50 = 1 can be used instead of G996.
Note 2: Byte parameters are not written in verify mode.

For a full list of the byte parameters, see the APPENDIX.

102
 SECTION TWO – PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

Force Error (G997)

Forces an error code to be displayed
Error code generated is round (parameter #1)

Example:
P1=407
G997 forces error #407 X-axis excess error to be displayed. X-axis does not
excess error, it only displays the error.
Note 1: P1=0 will not produce an error.
Note 2: All valid error codes on the control are between 1 and 999.

Beep (G998)
G998 will cause the speaker to beep if a speaker is installed.

Custom G Codes
Custom G codes can be created to execute a user-defined cycle such as a nonexistent drilling
cycle. To setup the new custom G code, first create a text program (numbered from 9010 to
9019) that defines the new G code. Next, enter the number of the new custom code in the F3
(Power) parameter section after the newly created text program.

The text program for the custom G code can reside in the RAM directory or parts directory. The
program in the RAM directory holds precedence over the program in the parts directory. If you
call any custom M or G code from within a custom code, it will execute its normal function. If a
syntax error exists in a custom code, the following window will appear upon power-up.

Example: Set F3 (Power) parameter custom G code O9014 to 005, and enter the program into
C:\RAM\O9014. Each time you execute a G5 it is similar to a call to C\RAM|\O9014.

Force Fatal Error (G999)

G999 will do division by 0 forcing fatal error #200. This is not recommended for any practical
purpose.

103
 SECTION THREE - MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS)
These codes are used if the operator is programming the 7000T Series control in the text or MDI
mode. They are also generated from conversational programs. It should be noted that most
programmers, particularly new programmers, use the conversational programming mode. If you
are planning to use text mode programming, pay close attention to this section explaining these
codes. If you are planning to use conversational mode programming, you can ignore or skim
over this section and concentrate on the conversational section.

The Miscellaneous Function codes are one or two digit numbers preceded by the letter M. If the
code is less than 10, zero entry is optional (M02 or M2). These codes are used to perform a
variety of machine and control functions as listed in the following table.

Note: The majority of the M codes that work with I/O are specific to Milltronics machines;
however, they are flexible and can be tailored to specific applications. There may be several
other M codes not listed here that deal with optional features on specific machines.

Executed Executed
M Codes Function
Before Move After Move
M00 Program Stop X
M01 Optional Stop X
M02 End of Program X
M30 End of Program / Spindle Off X
M03 Spindle on CW X*
M04 Spindle on CCW X*
M05 Spindle Off X*
M06 Tool Change X*
M08 Flood Coolant On X*
M09 Coolants Off X*
M31 Emergency Stop X*
M32 Wait Channel X*
M90 Graphics Off X*
M91 Graphics On X*
M98 Program Call Statement X*
M99 End of Program Statement X

Caution: The control will accept more than one M code on a line; however, it is
recommended that only one M code per line be programmed. When more than
one M code per line exists, the order of execution is somewhat undefined and the
program may not run as expected. In general the M codes will execute in
numerical order "M00 first M99 last" unless they have been defined to execute
after the move statements. (See section on machine setup.)

* These functions are selectable for either before or after the move.

105
SECTION THREE – MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS)

Program stop (M00)

The execution of the program is halted on the block containing the M00 and prompts the
operator to press cycle start. Program execution will be resumed when CYCLE START is
pushed. If M00 is on a line with a move command the move will be executed before the stop. If
there is a comment on the M0 block it will be displayed to prompt the operator.

Optional stop (M01)

M01 is the same as M00 except it is only executed if the optional stop switch is enabled.

Block skip ( / )
A line of program can be skipped or ignored by the control. Inserting a "/" at the beginning of a
line and enabling the BLOCK SKIP will cause the control to skip that line. In the example below
with BLOCK SKIP disabled, the machine will move to the first, second, and third points. When
BLOCK SKIP is enabled, the machine will move to the first then third points. Block two is
skipped.

N1 X0 Z0
/N2 X2 Z2
N3 X4 Z0

End of program (M02, M30, M99)

All of these codes can be used to indicate the end of a program. The only difference is that M02
and M99 will leave the spindle and coolant on while the M30 will turn them off. All of the codes
will return to the beginning of the program and start over when CYCLE START is pushed. If the
code is executed in a subprogram, execution returns to the calling program.

Spindle on/off (M03, M04, M05)

These codes turn the spindle on CW (M03), CCW (M04) and off (M05). The spindle on
commands will be executed before an axis command. M05 will execute after an axis command.
The spindle set up parameters determine the exact sequencing each command will use when
turning the spindle on and off.

Tool change (M06)

The standard M6 moves X to the tool change position. The command strobes the M function
buss and sends out a 150 millisecond (msec) pulse on the M06 I/O output. It then halts program
execution and prompts the operator to change the tool. If a comment is on the M6 block it will be
displayed to prompt the operator until it receives a tool change complete signal. The spindle
cannot be turned on until the tool change is completed. A CYCLE START is required after the
tool change complete signal is received to resume program operation. For safety reasons a
manual tool change should never be attempted unless the machine is in an M06 tool change
mode.

In many cases the machine tool builder may supply a custom M6 for automatic tool changer or
other special applications.

106
 SECTION THREE – MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS)

Coolants on/off (M08, M09)

The Coolant On command (M08) is executed before an axis command. The Coolant Off
command (M09) will be executed after an axis command.

Wait channel (M32)

Waits for the wait input channel (Z input #6).

Miscellaneous M codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60)

The standard M code is controlled by M65 (on) and M66 (off). These optional M codes control
the four spare functions. Spare function one is controlled by M67 (on) and M77 (off). Spare
function two is controlled by M68 (on) and M78 (off). Spare function three is controlled by M69
(on) and M79 (off). Spare function four is controlled by M50 (on) and M60 (off).

Graphics off/on (M90, M91)

On a few rare occasions the graphics function on the CNC should be turned off to prevent
redundant graphics. A general rule of thumb when writing a program with loops is to do an M90,
Graphics Off, after the first loop. This prevents redundant lines from building up in the graphics
memory. After the loop is finished M91, Graphics On, can be executed to display the next
section of the program. If the last command executed was a "Graphics Off" and the program is
started over, the "Run" program will always restore the CNC to a "Graphics On" state. The size
of the graphics file is limited to a size set by the machine tool builder. If this size is exceeded, no
additional graphics will be added to the screen.

Subprogram call (M98)

Subprogram terminate (M99)
The subprogram call command (M98) can be used to execute any program residing in memory
from another program. The called program will be executed until the end, and then control will
transfer back to the calling program one block after the M98 command.

When the main program calls a subprogram it is regarded as a one loop nest. Thus a two loop
nesting can be executed as shown below.

107
SECTION THREE – MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS)

An M98 command when used with an L___ command can call a subprogram repeatedly. An
L___ command can specify up to 999 repetitions of a subprogram.

Nesting up to 50 levels is allowed.

M2 or M30 can be used instead of M99. If a subprogram ends without an M2, M30 or M99 it
will return to the calling program as if an M2, M30 or M99 was encountered.

Note: "CALL" can be used in place of "M98".

Preparation of subprogram
A subprogram is the same as any other program.

Specifying M99 at the end of a subprogram is optional. If the program was called by an "M98"
or "CALL", an M02, M30 or M98 will return. Subprograms are entered into memory the same as
normal programs.

Note: M30 also shuts the spindle and coolant off.

Subprogram execution
A subprogram is executed when called by the main program or another subprogram. A
subprogram call has the following format:

M98 PXXXX LXXX

│ │
│ └──── number of times to repeat the subprogram
└────────── subprogram number

Example: M98 P0002 L5

M98 P2 L5
CALL 2 L5

This command is read like this: call subprogram number 2 five times.

When the loop number is omitted the subprogram is run once.

A subprogram call command and move command can be specified in the same block.

Example: X1 M98 P0200

In this example the subprogram #200 is called after completing movement in the X axis
direction.

108
 SECTION THREE – MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS)

The execution sequence of a main program, which calls a subprogram is as follows:

When the subprogram is called by another subprogram, it is executed in the same sequence as
shown in the above example.

Note 1: If the subprogram number specified cannot be found, an error message is

displayed.

Note 2: A subprogram call "M98___" cannot be executed from MDI. In this case write a
short program to call the subprogram.

0XXXX
M98PXXX
M02 Then execute it in the Run mode.

Note 3: If a subprogram modifies the work offset, (normally G50 on the first block of the
subroutine) the work offset will be restored to the same value upon leaving the
subprogram as it was when entering the subprogram. This can be useful for
cutting the same pattern at different locations.

Example: G0 X2.1 Z0
M98 P2 L4
M30

O0002
G50 X2.1 Z0
G1 X1.8

X2 Z-.2
G0 X2.1
Z-.5

109
SECTION THREE – MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M FUNCTIONS)

Note 4: If you use the "Call" statement, you can call subprograms with full dos names.

Example: Call C:\test\parts\xyz.prg

110
 SECTION FOUR - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING
Parametric programming is similar to macro programming in that equations can be used to
specify axis position rather than decimal numbers. The 7000T Series control does not restrict the
use of parametrics to subroutines or macros. They can be used anywhere throughout a program.
Parametric expressions cannot be used to specify M or G codes but can be used to specify axes X
Z A etc., and F and S functions. When a parametric expression is used for an axis position it will
first be evaluated and then cutter compensation will be applied. All the normal cutter
compensation rules will apply to the evaluated point. When using parametric expressions in a
program the parameters which are used are the 100 "User Parameters" discussed earlier. Values
generated by equations can be displayed on "User" parameter screens. Other listed system
parameters can be used as input data to parametric equations but under normal circumstances
these parameters should not be changed.

Parametric Reference
A parameter reference is specified by the letter "P" followed by a valid parameter number. When
a parameter reference is used for a coordinate position it must be contained in brackets.

Example: X [P10]
Z [-P145]

Parametric Assignment Statement

Assigning is the most basic statement in the use of parameters. The assignment character is an
equal sign (=).

Assignment statements replace the current value of a variable with a new value specified by an
operand type.

Example: P1 = 1.234

In this example the value 1.234 is assigned to parameter 1. Therefore both of the following
statements would move to the same coordinate position:

X1.234 or X[P1]

Notes: 1. If writing to parameters #'s greater than 699, the control needs to be in the
data mode (G11).

2. See the APPENDIX for a list of parameter numbers and their descriptions.

Byte Parameter
(In this case PB50 is spindle range.)
Byte parameters generally hold values that are representative of the machine configuration. For
example, the spindle range parameter PB50 will hold a value of the gear range. Byte parameter
values cannot exceed 255, and even then the value may not make sense. A PB50 value of 9 is
meaningless, because there are only 8 gear ranges.

111
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Example: PB50=2

Notes: 1. Byte parameters are not written in the verify mode.

2. See the Appendix for a list of parameter numbers and their description.

Parametric operators
Arithmetic operators
The following table shows the available arithmetic operators:

Operator Operation
+ addition
- subtraction
* multiplication
** exponent
/ division
DIV integer division
MOD remainder

The value of A div B is the mathematical quotient of A/B with any fractional portion or
remainder dropped.

Examples: 3/2 = 1.5 3 DIV 2 = 1

24/5 = 4.8 24 DIV 5 = 4
72/8 = 9.0 72 DIV 8 = 9
5.46/2.1 = 2.6 5.46 DIV 2.1 = 2

MOD (modula) remainder

The MOD operator returns the remainder obtained by dividing its two operands.
3 MOD 2 = 1 remainder = 1
24 MOD 5 = 4 remainder = 4
72 MOD 8 = 0 remainder = 0
3.57 MOD 2.1 = 1.47 Fract (3.57 2.1 =.7)
(.7 x 2.1 = 1.47)

112
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Relational operators
This table shows the available relational operators.

Operator Operation
EQ or = equal
NE or <> not equal
LT or < less than
GT or > greater than
LE or <= less or equal
GE or >= greater or equal

Function operators
A function call is specified by the function name (e.g. SIN, ATAN, . . .) followed by the function
argument in brackets. When a function is used for a coordinate position it must be contained in
brackets.

Examples: X [SIN [45]]

Z [SQRT[9]]

A function returns a value and can be used interchangeably anywhere that a decimal value is
accepted. Each function has one argument which can be specified using any of the four operand
types.

The functions supported are:

SIN - returns the sine of the argument.

SIN [90] = 1

COS - returns the cosine of the argument.

COS [180] = -1

TAN - returns the tangent of the argument.

TAN [135] = -1

ATAN - returns the arc tangent of the argument. The argument must be specified in
fractional form (e.g. 1/2, 2/1, -5/6, ...).
ATAN [1/-1] = 135

SQRT - Returns the square root of the argument.

SQRT [9] = 3

ABS - Returns the absolute value of the argument.

ABS [-15] = 15

INT - Returns the integer part of the argument.

INT [5.5099] = 5

113
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

RND - Returns an integer random number between 0 and its argument.

RND [25] will return an integer >0 and <24

LN - Returns the natural logarithm of the argument

LN [10] = 2.3026

EXP - Returns the exponential of the argument

EXP [1] = 2.7183

ROUND - rounds a decimal value to an integer value. Values halfway in-between are
rounded up.
ROUND [2.3] = 2
ROUND [7.88] = 8
ROUND [1.5] = 2
ROUND [-1.5] = -2
ROUND [3.5] = 4

Mathematic expressions
Expressions are made up of arithmetic operators and operands. Any combination of the
previously described operands may be used to define an expression.

Examples: X[SIN[P123]*COS[P124]]
P6=[2.5+[P2/P3]*SQRT[P4]]
Z[[P2DIV3]+[P2MOD3]]

Conditional statements
The 7000T Series control supports two types of conditional statements. These statements are
used to transfer control of a program from one point to another based on some condition
generated in the program. These statements are the IF THEN statement and the WHILE WEND
statement.

114
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

IF THEN
The IF THEN statement is a way of conditionally executing a block if the results of an
expression evaluates to true. The expression must contain one of the relational operators which
allows the expression to be reduced to either true or false. If the expression is true, the THEN
portion of the IF statement is executed. If the expression is false, the next line of the program is
executed.

Example of General Form

IF [any ] (relational) [any ] THEN any action

[mathematical] (operator) [mathematical] (opt.)
[expression] [expression]

N20 IF P1 LT P2 THEN GOTO 15

N21

or

N22 IF P1 LT P2 GOTO 15
N21

The above two statements do the same thing. If the statement is true, N15 is executed; if false
N21 is executed.

Examples: IF P1*P3/COS[P90] GE TAN[P6] THEN X1

IF P4/P3 LT P6 GOTO 25

IF P1 = P2 THEN P4 = P5 - P6

Multiple IF statements can be used to check for multiple conditions. For example:

IF P36<5 THEN IF P1<>0 THEN M5

means if P36 is less than 5 and P1 does not equal 0, shut the spindle off.

Note: The word "THEN" is optional.

WHILE WEND
The second type of conditional statement is the WHILE WEND statement. A WHILE statement
contains an expression that controls the repeated execution of the blocks contained between the
WHILE and WEND statements.

The expression controlling the repetition must contain one of the set of relational operators
which allows the expression to be reduced to either true or false. The expression is evaluated
before the contained blocks are executed. The contained blocks are executed repeatedly as long

115
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

as the expression is true. If the expression is false at the beginning the blocks are not executed at
all.

Example: N20 WHILE [[P2*P3]/COS[P6]] LT P2

N21 P6 = P6 + 1
N22 Z[P3]
N23 X[P6]
N24 X1 Z0
N25 WEND
N26 M30

In this example lines N20 thru N25 will be repeated until the WHILE expression becomes false.
Then line N26 will be executed instead of N21.

Note: Nested WHILE loops are allowed.

Transfer statements
These statements transfer control from one section of a program to another. They are
unconditional transfers in that when the statement is executed, control always transfers. The
GOSUB/RETURN and CALL statements return control to the N+1 block after they are finished,
and the GOTO statement transfers control to the specified block without a return.

GOTO statement
The statement N### defines a label. GOTO's/GOSUB'S can branch or transfer control to blocks
containing these labels. A GOTO statement transfers program execution to the block prefixed by
the block label referenced in the GOTO statement.

GOTO 30 (The next block executed is block N30.)

Note: If there is more than 1 "N30" in a program, it will transfer to the first N30.

CALL statement
A CALL statement transfers control to any program residing in the CNC's memory. Upon
completion of the called program or an M2, M99 or M30, control is returned to the main
program at the block immediately following the CALL statement.

The CALL format is as follows:

CALL XXXX LXXX

Program Loop Count
Number (Optional)

If the L is omitted the called program will be executed once. The call statement is the same as an
M98.

Notes: 1. Subprogram call allows nesting 50 levels deep.

116
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

2. See G50 in Section Two, page 47 for information on using G50 in subprograms.
3. Call to full dos names are allowed – Example: CALL S:\XYZ\PRG.X
4. It is not necessary for the sub-program to be called in a separate program. You
can call to an O#### in the same file. This eliminates the need to use the extract
programs parameter.

Example: X1 Y1
.
.
CALL 2 (Call to O0002)
.
.
M2 (the M2 here is optional)
O0002 (O#### in the same file has precedence over a separate
O#### file.
X2 Y2
.
.
M99 (the M99 here is optional)

GOSUB and RETURN

A GOSUB transfers program execution to the block number specified in the GOSUB statement.
Execution will continue until a block containing a RETURN statement is encountered. The
RETURN will transfer control back to the block immediately following the GOSUB statement.
To use a GOSUB statement, the called block number must be part of the same program.
Generally the subroutines would be at the end of the main program.

The GOSUB format is as follows:

GOSUB XXXX LXXX

Line # Loop Count (Optional)

If the L is omitted the GOSUB routine will be executed once.

117
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

N1
N2
N3
N4 GOSUB 100 Main Program
N5
.
.
.
N90 M30
N100
N101
.
. Subroutine
.
N200
N201 RETURN
N202

When the GOSUB is executed in N4 the program will jump to N100 and start executing until
N201 is reached. At N201 control will transfer to N5 and lines N5 thru N90 will be executed.
The M30 will terminate the main program and keep lines 100 thru 202 from being executed
again.

Notes: 1. Subroutine nesting is allowed to 50 levels deep.

2. See G50 in the Gcode section for information on using G50 in subroutines.

Computational Functions

1. Tangent Arc [TANA],

2. Tangent Line [TANL]
3. 3 Point Circle Generate [CGEN]

These three functions can be used anywhere throughout a program to solve various intersection
problems. These functions receive input data in parameters P90 thru P99, and return the answer
in parameters P80 through P89. The answers can then be used in line and circle commands to
produce the desired results. The format for these three functions follows.

GENERAL FORMAT FOR TANA, TANL

Input Parameters

P90 = Z1 center of arc 1

P91 = X1 center of arc 1
P92 = R1 radius of arc 1
P93 = Z2 center of arc 2
P94 = X2 center of arc 2

118
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

P95 = R2 radius of arc 2

P96 = R3 radius of tangent arc (use in TANA only)

Calculated Output Parameters

P80 = Zs Z starting point of tangent arc or line

P81 = Xs X starting point of tangent arc or line
P82 = Ze Z end point of tangent arc or line
P83 = Xe X end point of tangent arc or line
P84 = Zt ZC center of tangent arc (TANA case only)
P85 = Xt XC center of tangent arc (TANA case only)

The general form for a tangent arc or line function is

TANA C# or TANL C#

when # is a number 0 through 7 in the tangent arc case, and 0 through 3 in the tangent line case.
This number selects one of the eight possible solutions of the TANA or one of the four solutions
of the TANL. The values of C# are defined as the tangent point being to the right or left of a line
connecting the centers of the arcs and center of the connecting arc, when facing in the direction
of tool movement. See the following diagrams.

TANA CASES

1st 2nd Center

C0= Right Right Left

C1= Left Right Left
C2= Right Left Left
C3= Left Left Left
C4= Left Left Right
C5= Right Left Left
C6= Left Right Right
C7= Right Right Right

119
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

TANL CASES

1st 2nd

C0= Right Right

C1= Left Right
C2= Right Left
C3= Left Left

120
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Sample Program Using TANA or TANL

N1 P90=0 ZC of arc 1
N2 P91=0 XC of arc 1
N3 P92=1.5 radius of arc 1
N4 P93=5 ZC of arc 2
N5 P94=4 XC of arc 2
N6 P95=2 radius of arc 2
N7 P96=5 radius of tangent arc
(not used for tangent line)
N8 TANA C3 or TANL C3
N9 G2 R1.5 XC0 ZC0 X[P81] Z[P80]
(TANA or TANL calculated end points)

N10 G3 R5 XC[P85] ZC[P84] X[P83] 00002]

(TANA calculated center and end points)
or

N10 G1 X[P83] Z[P82]

(TANL calculated end point)

N11 G2 R2 XC4 ZC5 Xend Zend

depends on next line of program

The Circle Generate function will calculate the center and radius of an arc through any three non-
colinear points. The general format for the CGEN function is as follows:

Input Parameters

P90=Z1 P91=X1 coordinates of first point

P92=Z2 P93=X2 coordinates of second point
P94=Z3 P95=X3 coordinates of third point

Output Parameters

P80=ZC P81=XC center of calculated circle

P82=R radius of calculated circle

Sample Program using CGEN

N1 P90=0 P91=0 first point

N2 P92=1 P93=1 second point
N3 P94=2 P95=0 third point
N4 CGEN

121
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

N5 G1 X0 Z0 position to start of arc

N6 G2 R[P82] XC[P81] ZC[P80] Xe____Ze____

determined by next line of program

The CGEN function can be used anytime throughout the program to calculate the radius and
center of an arc. These calculations can then be used in a normal arc command along with trig
help, chamfer, corner round, extend back and any other function available in the control.

Note:The arc direction is returned in P97 so block N6 could be substituted with:

G2 IF P97=3 THEN G3
R[P82] XC[P81] ZC[P80] Xe_ Ze_

Back line
The back line function can be used on any line command. This function reverses the direction of
a programmed line. It would normally be used when you know the end point of the line and not
its start point. The end point would be programmed and the line would be extended backwards to
the start point. When using this function all Trig Help functions are still valid.

122
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Example 1:

(1) X4 Z0
(2) X3 Z-1
(3) G2 R1 ZC-2 AB270
(4) G1 X4 Z-4 BACK C0 W145

Back extend line backwards from (4,-4)

C0 use the arc intersection closest to (4,-4)
W145 extend the line from (4,-4) at an angle of 145º

Example 2:

(1) X4 Z0
(2) X3 Z1
(3) G2 R1 ZC-2 AB270
(4) G1 X4 Z-4 BACK C2 W145

C2 use farthest intersection

123
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Example 3:

(1) X4 Z0
(2) X3 Z-1
(3) X2 Z-1.5
(4) X4 Z-4 BACK C0
or C2 W-35

This example used a back line between two lines to program an unknown point.

Miscellaneous Commands
Spaces can be used anywhere within the program. For example, X1.234 can be written as X 1 .
23 4 if desired.

Blocks without any information are allowed.

Comments are any text enclosed in parentheses and they are ignored by the control. Comments
can be anywhere in a program or in a block. When a comment is on a block with an M0 (block
stop) or M6 (tool change), the comment will be displayed in the message window.

Example: M0 (MOVE TAIL STOCK AWAY FROM THE PART)

Example: M6 (3/8" STUB DRILL)

Print is used to print text to the screen. PRINT can be used to display text, parameter values,
times, dates, etc.

Example: PRINT [PLEASE CLEAR THE WORK AREA]

124
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

#n will show the value of a parameter (n is between 0 and 499).

Example: P87=32.45
PRINT [N=#87] shows "N=32.4500"

#n[LT] will show parameter n with L leading digits and T trailing digits.

Example: P100=1.235 P101=2.87656

PRINT [P100=#100[04] P101=#101[33]]shows "P100=1.2350
P101=00.877

If the leading and trailing fields are left blank, the default leading and trailing format for the
machine setup parameters is used.

When LT<0, exceptions apply.

If LT=0, the ASCII value of the parameter is shown.

Example: P1=72 (Ascii i)

P2=105 (Ascii i)
PRINT [#1[00]#2[00] shows "Hi"

If LT=-1, the parameter is ignored. The time is shown in format 0hh:mm:ss.

If LT=-2, the parameter is ignored. The date is shown in format yy/mm/dd.

Example: PRINT[Time=#1[-1] Date=#1[-2]] shows "Time=012:51:52

Date=93/12/17"

POPEN command opens a file or RS-232 for output using the DPRNT command.

POPEN P0 command opens a file for output. The file to open is specified in the MISC
parameters. If the file name in this parameter is blank, the output will be written to
B:\RAM\REPORT.DAT.

POPEN P1 opens serial port 1 for output.

POPEN P2 opens serial port 2 for output.

PCLOS will close a serial port that has been opened using POPEN.

DPRNT outputs text to a file or RS-232 port which is specified by the POPEN command.

Example: DPRNT [PLEASE CLEAR THE WORK AREA]

125
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

#n writes the value of a parameter.

Example: PRINT [X#209 Z#208] outputs the current X and Z positions to a file or
an RS-232 port.

#n[LT] will output parameter n with L leading digit and T trailing digits.

Example: P100=1.235 P101=2.87656

DPRNT [P100=#100[04] P101=#101[33] outputs "P100=1.2350
P101=002.877"

If the leading and trailing fields are left blank, the default leading and trailing format for the
machine setup parameters is used.

When LT<0, exceptions apply.

If LT=00, the ASCII value of the parameter is shown.

Example: P1=40 Ascii (

P2=72 Ascii H
P3=105 Ascii i
P4=41 Ascii )
PRINT [#1[00]#2[00]#3[00]#4[00]] outputs "Hi"

If LT=-1, the parameter is ignored. The time is shown in format 0hh:mm:ss.

If LT=-2, the parameter is ignored. The date is shown in format yy/mm/dd.

Example: DPRNT [Time=#1[-1] Date=#1[-2]] shows "Time=012:51:52

Date=93/12/17"

DPRNT can be used to generate report files relating to parts production, parts inspections,
digitizing information, etc.

INPUT statement is used for data input from the front panel.

Example: INPUT (X START POSITION) P1

The operator will be prompted to input data.

126
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

The operator can use the data displayed by pushing the ENTER NEW DATA key. If ESC is
pressed during an input statement, the program will be terminated.

The HDW command can be used to use the handwheel during a program. A comment may be
added to prompt the operator during the HDW command. HDW is ignored when verifying a
program or from MDI.

Example: HDW (TOUCH THE TOOL TO PART) prompts the operator with the
message.

To manually set and clear input/output pins:

See the appendix pages 320-323 for updated 7000 Series I/O screens (J1 – J4) and how they
compare to the previous diagnostic display arrangement. On these screens, a white dot is the
active state, and a black dot is the inactive state.

CLR Clear an output pin.

Example: CLR X7 (clear X output #7)

SET Set an output pin.

Example: SET Z3 (sets Z output #3)

PULSE0 Pulses an output pin.

Example: PULSE0 Z10 (clears Z output #10, delays for the number of milliseconds
specified by the MISC parameter PULSEx pulse delay (ms) then clears sets
output Z10)

PULSE1 Pulses an output pin.

Example: PULSE1 X5 (sets X output #5 delays for the number of milliseconds specified
by the MISC parameter PULSEx pulse delay (ms) then clears output X5)

STO STO is similar to the SET command, except the outpus are consecutive. There
are twelve outputs on each axis.
Example: STO20 (sets output #8 or the 20th output)

CLO CLO is similar to the CLR command, except the outputs are consecutive.
Example: CLO13 (clears X output 1 or the 13th output)

PIN Refers to a pin. Z axis are 1000's, X axis 2000's.

127
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

PIN Z Axis X Axis 3rd Axis 4th Axis 5th Axis 6th Axis
in1 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
in2 1001 2001 3001 4001 5001 6001
in3 1002 2002 3002 4002 5002 6002
in4 1003 2003 3003 4003 5003 6003
in5 1004 2004 3004 4004 5004
in6 1005 2005 3005 4005 5005
in7 1006 2006 3006 4006 5006
in8 1007 2007 3007 4007 5007
in9 1008 2008 3008 4008 5008
in10 1009 2009 3009 4009 5009
in11 1010 2010 3010 4010 5010
in12 1011 2011 3011 4011 5011

out1 1012 2012 3012 4012 5012 6012

out2 1013 2013 3013 4013 5013 6013
out3 1014 2014 3014 4014 5014 6014
out4 1015 2015 3015 4015 5015 6015
out5 1016 2016 3016 4016 5016
out6 1017 2017 3017 4017 5017
out7 1018 2018 3018 4018 5018
out8 1019 2019 3019 4019 5019
out9 1020 2020 3020 4020 5020
out10 1021 2021 3021 4021 5021
out11 1022 2022 3022 4022 5022
out12 1023 2023 3023 4023 5023

PIN statements can be used in conditional statements such as IF..THEN and WHILE..WEND.

Examples would be: IF PIN[2017] EQ 1 THEN PB50 = 1

WHILE PIN[1005] NE 0
M62
M63
WEND
P5=P3 + PIN[2011]

IPIN
IPIN refers to an input pin. The argument is the input number. IPIN [32] is the 32nd input. There
are 64 inputs. IPIN [22] is X input #10. IPIN [18] is the same as PIN [2005] or X input #6. The
IPIN statements can be used in conditional statement or to assign variables.

OPIN
OPIN refers to an output pin. The argument is the output number. OPIN [14] is the 14th output.
There are 64 outputs. OPIN [40] is 4th axis output #4. OPIN [4] is the same as pin [1003] or Z

128
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

axis input 4. The OPIN statements can be used in conditional statements or to assign variables.

Parts Inspection and Digitizing Commands

PROBE1 can be used with any axis move to command an interrupted move. The move will be
terminated when an input goes low.

Example: PROBE1 G98 F.01 X1.3 Z-2

The X and Z move toward 1.3 and -2 respectively until the probe contacts
the part.

PROBE2 can be used with any axis move to command an interrupted move. The move will be
terminated when an input goes high.

Example: PROBE2 G98 F.01 X1.3 Z-2

The X and Z move toward 1.3 and -2 respectively until the probe releases
from the part.

Note: The input used by the probe command is selectable in the miscellaneous parameters.

MOD
MOD is used to shift an axis position. It is generally used for rotary axis to obtain a positive
position between 0 and 360 degrees. It can be useful after a rotary axis has made several
revolutions in the same direction.

Examples:
G0 A750
MOD A360 (A axis position is now 30°)

G0 A-100
MOD A360 (A axis position is now 240°)

G0 A-500
MOD A360 (A axis position is now 220°)

G0 A437
MOD A20 (A axis position is now 17°)

G0 A33.285
MOD A2.1 (A axis position is now 1.785°)
33.285 / 2.1 = 15.85
15.85 remainder is .85
.85 * 2.1 = 1.785

Note: Using the MOD command also shifts the software limits. This is desirable for most rotary
axis, but is undesirable for linear axis.

129
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

ORIGIN
Origin is another way to shift axis coordinates. It shifts the axis coordinates by the operator
amount.

Examples:
G0 X437
ORIGIN X20 (X axis position is now 417)

G0 X33.285
ORIGIN X2.1 (X axis position is now 31.185)

G0 X361
ORIGIN X360 (X axis position is now 1)

G0 X-500
ORIGIN X360 (X axis position is now -860)

Note: The origin command also shifts the software limits.

HOME
To home an axis in a program, use the HOME command.

Example: Home Z0 (Homes the Z axis the number “0” doesn’t mean anything)
Home X0Z0 (Homes the X and Z axis)

SAMPLE PROGRAM USING SOME SPECIAL STATEMENTS

(DIGITIZING PROGRAM)
M5
T0101
G00
Z15
M6 (PROBE)

POPEN P0 (open file for output) (SET REPORT.DAT to C:\PARTS\00100)

PB81=7 (set byte parameter special flags to shut off trig help and cutter comp)

INPUT (OUTER DIAMETER)P1 (prompt for data)

INPUT (INNER DIAMETER)P4
INPUT (PROBE INCREMENT)P5

DPRNT [(WHEEL CUTTING)] (write data to file)

DPRNT [M42] (custom code for cutting program to shift to 2nd gear)
DPRNT [PB81=1] (special flags byte parameter to show tool in cutting program)
DPRNT [G0 Z2]

130
 SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING
DPRNT [X#1] (X to outer diameter)
DPRNT [G99 F.01] (feeds to cut at)
DPRNT [G50 S1200] (speeds to cut at)
DPRNT [G96 S1200]
DPRNT [G1]
DPRNT [M3]

P157=P1 (set length and diameter for graphics)

P156=P142
G0 Z1
X[P1] (move to outer diameter to start digitizing)
G98
P2=P1 (X position)
G1 F20
N1
PROBE1 Z-6 (probe fast to the part)
PROBE2 Z1 (probe off the part)
F.5
PROBE1 Z-6 (probe slow to the part)

P3=P209*2 (X diameter = current X position *2)

DPRNT[G1 X#3 Z#208] (write current X and Z positions to file)

F5
P2=P2-P5 (subtract probe increment from current X position)
X[P2] (move over to next X position)
PROBE2 Z1 (move off part)

IF P2>P4 GOTO 1 (are we at the inner diameter yet?)

G0R.1 AB0 (retract the probe)

X6.0
Z10.
X17.25

DPRNT[G0R.1AB0] (retract for the cutting program)

DPRNT[X6]
DPRNT[Z10.]
DPRNT[M5]
DPRNT[X#1]

OUTPUT FROM THE DIGITIZING PROGRAM

(WHEEL CUTTING)
M42
PB81=1
G0 Z2
X16.4856
G99 F.01
G50 S1200
G96 S1200
G1
M3
G1 X16.4856Z-0.1214

131
SECTION FOUR – PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING
G1 X16.4656Z-0.0931
G1 X16.4456Z-0.0752
G1 X16.4256Z-0.0614
G1 X16.4056Z-0.0500
G1 X16.3856Z-0.0404
G1 X16.3656Z-0.0318
G1 X16.3456Z-0.0246
.
.
.
G1 X6.1256Z-0.3276
G1 X6.1056Z-0.3258
G1 X6.0856Z-0.3241
G1 X6.0656Z-0.3224
G1 X6.0456Z-0.3206
G1 X6.0256Z-0.3189
G1 X6.0056Z-0.3172
G0R.1AB0
X6
Z10.
M5
X16.4856

132
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CNC 7200

133
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Centurion 7T / 7000 Series Front Panels

The 7000 series front panel has two alpha-numeric keypads and 12 function keys. The keypads
are used to enter the alphanumeric data requested by the CNC. The upper keypad is primarily
used to enter alpha characters. To enter one of the shifted characters simply hit SHIFT, then the
character. After the character has been entered the control automatically returns to the non-
shifted character set. Shift also works in the same manner on the lower or numeric keypad.
Spaces between commands are optional when data is entered, but the Enter must be pushed to
end a line of data or to go on to the next function. The operation of the 12 function keys changes
as different menus are displayed on the display. The following sections explain in detail each
function key meaning.

The lower section of the panel is dedicated to manual machine cycles. On the far left of the panel
is the electronic handwheel which, when turned in the handwheel mode, will cause the selected
axis to move. Next to the handwheel are the manual feed controls for the machine's axes.
Turning the feedrate override will modify the current machine feedrate by the indicated
percentage. Pressing the Feedhold button will cause axis motion to stop. To restart axis motion,
press Feedhold again and depress the Cycle Start button. The Cycle Start button needs to be
depressed anytime a machine command is to be executed. Cycle Start will blink when it needs
to be depressed.

The next section of the panel deals with the spindle and coolant controls. The spindle override
switch will modify the current spindle rpm by the selected percentage. If the machine is not
equipped with a variable speed spindle option, the override switch has no effect on the spindle.
The spindle CCW, CW and Stop buttons will override the current control commands giving the
operator full manual override capabilities. The active state of the spindle will be represented by
the illuminated button. The coolant buttons (Mist and Flood) work identically to CW and CCW.
When they are lit, the function is active; however, the coolant will not turn on until the spindle is
started. The Tool Reset button is only active during an M6 command. This button is a safety
interlock, which prevents the spindle from starting during a manual tool change. The button will
start flashing during a tool change and will need to be depressed after the tool change is
completed before program operation can be resumed. The Emergency Stop button, when
pushed, will stop all machine actions instantly. Once Emergency Stop is depressed, the Reset
button will flash indicating that it must be pushed before any machine motion can be performed.
The control is always in an Emergency Stop state after power-on. The preceding diagram shows
the layout of the 7000 Series and Centurion front panels.

134
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Diagram of Main Screen

1 2 3

5 8

7
1 RunTime
When you are verifying a program the runtime displays the calculated time to make the
parts. When you are running a program it shows the elapsed time since the program was
started. The total of all program run times are kept in the “Job Time” parameter (F7
Parms – F9 Ctrl).
2 History Line
History Line shows you where you are in the software and where you came from. If you
are modifying the tool table, the history line would say Main-Parms-Tool-Edit.
3 Active Program
Active Program displays the program that you are running or verifying. If you are editing
a program it will show the active edit program. If you are sending a file over the RS-232
it will show the program being sent.
4 Current Position
Current Position is the position relative to the work offset zero. X-axis positions are
specified as diameter values.
5 Next Position
If you are running or verifying, the Next Position is the position that the machine is going
to.
6 Distance
Distance is the remaining distance the machine has left to go to finish the move being
executed.
7 The Function Keys
Highlighted Function Keys are active or available.
8 Status Window
Status Window displays detailed information on the state of the control. A detailed
description is given below.

135
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Diagram of Status Window

1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Diagram of Status Window

1 The \ changes back and forth to / and \ each time the status window is updated.
2 Comp: Tool Radius Compensation (Left, Right or Cancelled)
3 Tool: The first two digits indicate the active tool number. The second two digits in
parentheses indicate the pending tool number. If you execute a T1414 without the M6 the
pending tool number will be 14.

136
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4 The X-axis tool length.

5 The Z-axis tool length.
6 The tool nose radius.
7 Shows the current work offset G54…G59.
8 Interpolation, Linear (Feed), Linear (Rapid), Circular (CW), or Circular (CCW)
9 Feedrate: The programmed feedrate and its units (English feed per minute) ipm, (Metric
feed per minute) mmpm, (English feed per revolution) ipr, (Metric feed per revolution)
mmpr (If the machine is rapid mode the units will always be ipm or mmpm.)
10 Feedrate override: The position of the feedrate override and the resulting feedrate. If the
machine is programmed to move faster than its maximum, the clamped feedrate will be
displayed, and a “*” will be displayed next to the %.
11 Units: (Absolute) Abs or (Incremental) Inc and English or Metric
12 Cycle: If there is a canned cycle or autoroutine active it will be displayed on this line.
13 Dwell: When a dwell is executed the dwell time will count down to zero.
14 Spindle: The programmed revolution per minute if the control is in RPMs or feet per
minute (or meters per minute) if the control is in constant surface speed.
15 Spindle override and direction: The position of the spindle override and the actual rpm.
This line also displays whether the spindle is off or running CW or CCW.
16 The spindle load meter will show the load on the spindle. It becomes longer and changes
color from blue to green to yellow to red as the load increases.
17 Coolant, Off, Mist, Flood or Mist/Flood
18 The Parts Counter increments each time a program ends normally. It will not increment if
a program is aborted, or if there is an error in the program. It does not increment in dry
run, verify or MDI. It does increment on RUN, DNC-Run and DNC-Fast. The parameter
number used for the counter is P699 (you can use this for engraving or what ever you
choose). You can increment the counter by any value. The parameter for incrementing is
P698. There is no place to set this, you have to execute and MDI P698=#. You can zero,
increment or decrement the counter using:
Shift-F1 (zero/reset)
Shift-F2 (decrement) (it will not decrement below zero)
Shift-F3 (increment)
You have to push and hold the Shift while pressing the F key.

The remainder of this section will explain each function that can be executed from the front
panel. The history line for each function is the sequence of keys to push to get to that function
from the main menu. Highlighted keys on the display mean they are the currently selected mode
or their functions are available for use on this screen.

F1 (Home) Main-Home
Following a power off sequence, the control will always have to be homed after the machine has
been reset. Each axis will seek a home limit switch and a marker pulse on the encoder. After this
procedure is finished, the machine's reference position will be established and will be recalled
until another power off. To initiate a home sequence, push ESC until the main screen is reached
and then push F1 (Home). A message requesting that the Cycle Start button be depressed will
appear on the screen and will start flashing. Pressing Cycle Start will start the home sequence,
and when it is finished the main screen will return. Homing parameters may be adjusted in the

137
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

axis parameters.

F10 (Here) Home-Here

F10 (Here) is only active if the correct password has been entered in the setup parameters.

The machine can be homed without moving the axis. Toggle the F10 (Here) key when the key is
lit and push Cycle Start. The position of the machine will be assumed as home zero. This action
is useful in that it allows jogging, handwheeling, or MDI’ing without physically homing first. It
is not recommended you run programs unless the machine is homed in the normal fashion as the
software limits will not be valid after F10 (Here).

F2 JOG (MAIN-JOG)
Jog is used to move the machine around in a manual mode to pick up zeroes and align parts.
Upon pushing JOG the following screen appears:

The function keys across the bottom of the screen select the desired jogging mode. The F1
(Slow) key selects slow jog. The feed override is active and speeds up or slows down the jog
speed. The F2 (Fast) key selects rapid jog. The machine tool builder determines the slow and
rapid feedrates and has the ability to change the values for each in the axis parameters. The F3
(↔) key selects the continuous jog mode. The jog defaults to continuous each time F3 (↔) is
depressed. In continuous jog, the selected axis continues moving until the user releases the axis
key or encounters the software limits. In incremental jog, the axis moves the selected increment
and then stops each time the user presses and releases an axis key. After the operator presses the
F4 (Dist) key, the control prompts the user to enter the desired amount of increment. The
keyboard diagram displays the direction in which an axis moves when the corresponding key on
the numeric keypad is pressed. To exit the incremental jog mode, the user depresses F3 (↔).
Depending upon the value of the miscellaneous parameter “use FLZ instead of G54", the F5 and
F6 keys perform either a G54 or a G92 for X or Y at the current machine position. This can be

138
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

thought of as call this position "##.####". The F7 key is used to set tool lengths; the operator is
prompted for the Z-axis position. If the user desires to leave the jog mode, pushing the ESC
(Exit) key exits the jog mode and returns the control to the main screen.

Note 1: Slow and fast jog feedrates can be modified in the setup parameters.
Note 2: Jog key directions can be reversed in the setup parameters.
Note 3: The machine must be homed prior to jogging.

F3 HDW (MAIN-HDW)
The Handwheel mode is used to move the machine around using the electronic handwheel. It is
used mainly to set tool length offsets and part setup. Upon pushing HDW the following screen
will appear:

The F keys across the bottom of the screen are used to select which axis will move when the
handwheel is turned. The feedrate override switch will determine the distance each axis will
move for one click of the handwheel. A feed override of 10% will cause the axis to move .0001
inch or .001mm on metric mode for each handwheel position. The active axis key will be
highlighted when it is selected to move (F1 for X axis or F2 for Z axis).

Note: Axis distances per handwheel click at feedrate override positions can be modified in the
setup parameters.

The F6 key XTOOL or ZTOOL is used to set tool length offsets into the tool table. In the
handwheel mode a tool can be moved to a desired location. When F6 is pressed the control will
ask for the position of the tool, i.e. Z position for Z axis or diameter for the X axis.

139
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The F9 key is used to set up a work offset other than work offset #1. Each time F9 is pressed it
will advance to the next work offset that is displayed. When (F8) G5#-Z is pressed a Z zero is set
for the appropriate work offset. (Note: F8 and F9 are only active if the Z axis is active.)

PROCEDURE FOR SETTING TOOL LENGTH OFFSET AND WORK OFFSETS

The following procedure assumes that G54 (Work Offsets #1) offsets are being used instead of
G50 (Floating Zero) offsets. It also assumes that the face of the material is considered Z0.

1. Make sure all G50 offsets are zero. They are zeroed on power up or can be zeroed by
using F7 (PARMS) - F2 (COORD) and editing the G50 offsets.

2. Make sure G54 X offset is zero. It can be zeroed by using F7 (PARMS) - F2 (COORD)
and editing the G54 offset.

3. Make sure tool #1, Z length, is zero. It can be zeroed by using F7 (PARMS) - F3
(TOOLS) and editing the tool table.

4. Make sure all tool wear offsets are zero. They can be zeroed using F7 (PARMS) - F4
(WEAR) and editing the wear offset table.

Note: When a tool length is set, the wear offset for that tool is zeroed.

5. Make tool #1 active. Do an MDI T0101 M6.

6. Using the handwheel, touch the tip of the tool to the face of the material (or line up the
center of the tool tip to the face of the part for diamond shaped turning tools). Then press
F8 (G54-Z). Type in the Z axis position (normally zero).

7. Using the handwheel, make a small turning cut on the diameter of the material. Then
enter the diameter of your small cut for the position.

For drills, center the drill at the center of the material. Press F6 (XTOOL). Then enter 0
for the position.

The X offset for diamond shaped facing tools can be set like a drill or by lining up the
center of the tool tip to a diameter on the part. Press F6 (XTOOL), and then enter the tool
number and position.

8. Make the next tool active. Do an MDI T#### M6. (T0202 for tool #2, T0303 for tool #3 .
. . etc.)

9. Using the handwheel, touch the tip of the tool to face of the material (or line up the center
of the tool tip to the face of the part for diamond shaped turning tools). Then press F6
(ZTOOL) then enter the Z axis position for the tool position (normally zero).

140
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

10. Using the handwheel, make a small turning cut on the diameter of the material. Press F6
(XTOOL). Then enter the diameter of the small cut for the position.

For drills, center the drill at the middle of the material. Press F6 (XTOOL) and enter the
tool number. Then enter 0 for position.

The X offset for diamond shaped facing tools can be set like a drill or by lining up the
center of the tool tip to a diameter on the part. Press F6 (XTOOL), and then enter the
position.

11. Go to step #8 (for the next tool).

12. Enter the tool types and tool nose radii in the tool table by pressing F7 (PARMS) - F3
(TOOLS) and then editing the tool table. F1 (TOOL>) toggles the tool type.

Some sample tool types:

1 - inside turning (chuck towards the tail stock)

2 - inside turning (tail stock towards the chuck)

3 - outside turning (tail stock towards the chuck)

4 - outside turning (chuck towards the tail stock)

5 - inside threading
- inside turning using a diamond insert
- boring tools using a diamond insert

6 - drills
- face grooving
- facing tools

7 - threading
- outside turning using a diamond insert
- cut off tools
- outside diameter grooving

Note 1: The tool type relates to the imaginary tool tip and how the tool offsets are set.

Note 2: If the front turret parameter is set, the graphics of the tool in the tool table reflect the
fact that the tool is coming from the front. It does not affect the actual tool type number.

Note 3: When setting the tool length for X or Z axis, the corresponding wear offset is zeroed.

141
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

To check the work and tool offset, select [MDI].

For each tool: Type T0101 M6 (T0202 . . etc.) [ENTER]

[CYCLE START] Then type: G0 X0 Z.1 or safe distance

Caution: The machine will move at a rapid feedrate. Each tool should position itself to the
center of the spindle and 0.1000 or safe distance from the face of the part.

142
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F4 RUN (MAIN-RUN)
Run is used to execute the active program. Upon pushing the RUN button the following screen
appears:

After the above screen appears, F1 START would be pushed to run the active program shown in
the upper right-hand box and the following screen would appear:

The F1 FIRST key is automatically selected when entering this screen from the RUN screen.
Therefore if it is desired to run the active program from the beginning, all that is necessary is to
push the CYCLE START button. If F2 BLOCK is pushed, the control will request that the

143
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

desired block or sequence number (to start the program from) be typed in, followed by ENTER.
If the Cycle Start button is pushed the active program will start running from the selected block
number. If F3 TOOL is pushed, the control will request a tool number. After typing the tool
number (to start the program from) followed by an ENTER, the CYCLE START button is
pushed, and the active program will start running at the desired tool number and the following
screen will appear.

Note: If the block number or tool number requested is not found in the active program, a
message will say it was not located and Cycle Start will start the program from the
beginning.

This screen is the basic run screen after CYCLE START has been pressed. It has two new
additions, a block number display and F9 HALT. The block number shows the current line being
executed as the program runs. The HALT key is similar to FEEDHOLD in that when pushed the
machine will stop. However, unlike FEEDHOLD, the HALT also exits the "Run" mode and
allows a new program to be started.

F9 RESUM (MAIN-RUN)
Once a program has been "Halted" the "Resume" feature of the control becomes active. The F9
RESUM key will now be displayed on the Run screen. A program can be Resumed as long as
one of the following functions is not performed: Verify, MDI, Home, Emergency Stop or
modifying parameters. If none of the above functions are done the axis can be Jogged or
Handwheeled away from the work, the spindle turned on or off, or any other function performed,
and the "Resume" remains active. As long as the Resume is active the F8 key on the Run screen
will show a "Resume" function. If the Resume function is selected, the active program will be
resumed at the halted point, when "Resume" "Cycle Start" is executed.

144
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

If the Z position is less than the Z clearance:

1. Z rapids to its clearance.

2. X rapids to its halted position.
3. Wait for another cycle start.
4. Z moves to its halted position at its last feed/minute feedrate.
5. Resume program from this position.

If the Z position is greater than the Z clearance:

1. X rapids to its halted position.

2. Z rapids to its clearance.
3. Wait for another cycle start.
4. Z moves to its halted position at its last feed/minute feedrate.
5. Resume program from this position.

Note: Once the "Run" or "Verify" modes have been entered, a "Halt" must be executed if the
mode is to be exited prior to program completion.

F2 OLD (MAIN-RUN-OLD)
The OLD key will allow entry, in the message window, of the number of an existing text
program. After the number has been entered, the control will check the text programs currently
in memory to see if a program by that number is there. If it is, that program will become the
active program. If not, an error stating that the program was not found will appear and after
pressing the ESC key, another number may be entered.

The F3, F4, F5 and F8 keys on the RUN screen set the mode of operation a program will run in.
When these keys are in a highlighted state, the functions will be active in any currently running
program or program to be run.

F3 BLOCK (MAIN-RUN)
When the BLOCK switch is activated the program will stop at the end of each block. Each time
the CYCLE START button is pushed one more block will be run.

F4 OSTOP (MAIN-RUN)
When the Optional Stop switch (OSTOP) is activated the program will stop at each M01
command. When the CYCLE START button is pushed the program will continue to run.

F5 BSKIP (MAIN-RUN)
When the Block Skip switch (BSKIP) is activated the program will skip all blocks started with a
"/".

Example: /M5 When the block skip switch is active the spindle off command will
not be executed.

145
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ
The F6 (Displ) key can be accessed from a number of screens. The following screen is shown as
though the F6 (Displ) was entered from the RUN screen. All the display functions and screens
are identical, independent of the entry point. Only the return point differs based on the original
entry point. When the F6 (Displ) key is depressed, the following screen will appear.

Note: X axis is displayed as a diameter value.

Note: F7 and F9 only come up in protected modes.

F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist
When the F1 (Dist) key is activated, the display shows the current position, next position, and the
distance to go.

146
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error
The Following Error refers to the lag in the servo system.

The F2 (Error) key changes the display to read current position, next position, and Following
Error. The Following Error display is intended to help in machine setup or troubleshooting an
axis problem. When F2 (Error) is pressed, the following screen will appear.

F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph
If the F3 (Graph) key is pressed the control switches from displaying text to a graphic display of
the active part program. The following screen will appear:

147
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Red lines represent rapid moves. Green lines represent feed moves. Yellow lines represent the
finish pattern of rough cycles and repeat cycles.

The next section will explain how to manipulate the part displayed in the graphics area. All the
following functions are accessible through the Displ-Graph screen.

Note: The graphics are cleared from the display at the start of run or verify of a program.

F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan
The F2 (Pan) key selects the Pan function (Pan), which allows the operator to pan around a part.
The following display will appear.

Cross hairs appear on the screen and can be moved around using the arrow keys F7 thru F10 or
the numeric keypad. To pan, simply move the cursor to the point on the display, which is desired
to be at the center of the screen and push F5 (Enter) or the ‘Enter’ key on the keyboard. The
display will shift to its new position and panning can be started again. The ESC key will cancel
the Pan function and return to the Graph screen. The crosshairs can also be used to verify
coordinates on the part displayed on the screen.

148
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind
The F3 (Wind) key selects the window function, which allows the operator to window in on a
particular area of the part. The following display will appear when Window is selected.

Cross hairs appear on the screen and can be moved around using the arrow keys F7 thru F10 or
the numeric keypad (the same as Pan). To window, move the cursor to the first corner of the
window area and hit F5 (Enter) or the ‘Enter’ key. Then move the cursor around until the desired
area of the part to be viewed is enclosed in the rectangular box being drawn on the screen and hit
‘Enter’. The area enclosed in the box will now be displayed on the entire screen. The ESC key
will cancel the window function and return to graph screen. The crosshairs can be used to verify
coordinates and distances between features on the part.

F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto
The F4 (Auto) key selects the Auto Zoom function. This function automatically scales and
centers the described material size.

F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph
The F5 (Zoom-) key selects Zoom- which decreases by one half the size of the part currently
being displayed on the screen. Generally this function is used to view a larger portion of the part.

F6 (Zoom+) Main-Run-Displ-Graph
The F6 (Zoom+) key selects the Zoom+ function. This function doubles the size of the part being
displayed on the screen. Generally this function is used to enlarge a specific area of a part
enabling one to see greater detail.

149
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph
The F7 (Limit) key draws a box on the screen, which corresponds to the axis limits of the
machine. This allows viewing of the part in relation to the machine's overtravel. The machine
tool builder sets the machine's software limits.

F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph
The F8 (Zone) key draws a box on the screen which corresponds to an axis safe zone. This is a
zone which the tool cannot enter. If the tool is programmed into this box an "attempted to move
into safe zone" error will be generated.

F8 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph
The F9 (Fresh) key redraws the currently displayed part on the screen.

F10 (Clear) Main-Run-Displ-Graph

The F10 (Clear) key clears the current display buffer. After the clear screen command nothing
will be displayed until either the program is Verified or Run again. It is generally used to clear
MDI moves from the graphic display.

F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag
The F4 (Diag) key is mainly used for machine setup or troubleshooting machine functions. The
diagnostic screens shows all the external I/O bits connected to the CNC. The status of each bit is
continuously displayed on the screen, and as they change on the machine the screen will be
updated. Function keys F1 thru F6 display the various axes enabled on the CNC. Selecting X or
Z brings up the appropriate axis I/O channels. A "0" displayed on the screen means the I/O
channel is not active. A "1" indicates active.

See the appendix pages 320-323 for updated 7000 Series I/O screens (J1 – J4) and how they
compare to the previous diagnostic display arrangement. On these screens, a white dot is the
active state, and a black dot is the inactive state.

150
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The following screens represent the displayed information for the various axis selections.

Note: The diagnostic screens will differ for machines that have varying options. The text that
shows up on the screen is from the files INP.XXX and OUT.XXX, where XXX is the extension for
the desired language to display on the screen. The INP.XXX and OUT.XXX files for a basic
machine with no options are present in the ROM directory. The files that correspond with the
options that a machine might have will be present in the RAM directory. The control will first
check the RAM directory. If the files are not found in the RAM directory, the control will use the
default files in the ROM directory.

151
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Each axis has inputs and outputs, pressing F1…F6 will show the inputs and outputs for the
associated axis.

Note: Machines with tool changers, etc. will have different diagnostics screens.

F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs
The F7 (OBS) key will only display in access level 2 or greater. F7 (OBS) will be highlighted
and is only available if the current display is F1 (Next) or F2 (Dist). It will display information
on the motion control cards. F7 (Obs) comes up in protected modes only.

F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell
F9 (Shell) is available if the control is in access level 2 or greater. It will Shell out to DOS. To
return to the CNC, type exit. F9 (Shell) comes up in protected modes only.

F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu
The F7 (Menu) key selected from the Run or Verify screen brings up a window containing a
listing of all the available programs, which may be run. The screen shown below will be dis-
played when the program menu is requested.

To activate one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow and page keys to move the
cursor to the desired program and press F5 (Enter), or Enter’ on the keyboard. The Menu
function can be called from other screens but works the same way from all. When called from
the Run or Verify screen, the selected program becomes the active program. When called from
an edit screen, the selected program becomes the current program being edited. F1 (Verf) will
graphically verify the part the curser is on. F6 (Togle) will display the file size, last time and date
it was edited, and seven characters for the file name. Subdirectories are specified by <DIR> as

152
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

the file name. The “..” specifies the parent to the current directory. If you press the HELP (Drive)
key, a list of the available drives is displayed.

Note: The file name is enclosed in parentheses. If there are no parentheses on the first block,
the file name is the first block. Pressing the “D” key toggles the menu to and from “Full Dos
Filenames”. Pressing the “N” key toggles sorting files by filename and file description.

F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry
When the F8 (Dry) switch is active, all program feedrates will run at the dry run feedrate.

Note 1: The spindle commands can be ignored during dry run by setting a parameter.

Note 2: Switching to or from DRY RUN can only be done if the program is first halted then
switched to or from DRY RUN and then resuming the program. The F8 (Dry) key will
not be visible if the program is running.

F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW

When the F10 (HDW) switch is active, the axes moves in the program will relate to turning the
electronic handwheel. The feedrates (feed/rev. or feed/min.) will affect the distance moved per
click of the handwheel. There are four miscellaneous parameters that affect the distance moved
per click of the handwheel. They are:

1. Handwheel Encoder PPU

This should be 400 for our current systems.

2. Cranking Minutes/Rev
This determines how many minutes of normal program execution time should correspond
to one turn of the handwheel. Multiplying an IPM feed times this factor results in an IPR
feed (inches per turn of the handwheel). This should be about 0.0010 for our current
systems.

3. Cranking Max IPM

This allows for a reasonable handcranked speed for slow feedrate programmed moves,
while limiting the speed and avoiding excess errors on high feedrate programmed moves.

153
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4. Cranking Factor
This is the defined multiplier for each handwheel click. It should be about 100 for our
current system.

For lathe IPR mode:

Cranking Factor = X*IPR Scale* (Resolution Spindle)/ (Resolution Handwheel); e.g., if
X = 10, one turn of the handwheel will have the same effect as would ten turns of the
spindle.
If X = 10 is desired, then
Resolution Spindle = 4000
Resolution Handwheel = 400
IPR Scale = 1
Then Cranking Factor = 100

If handwheeling and dry running a program, the distance moved per click of the handwheel
relates to the Dry Run Feed parameter.

If handwheeling a program and a tapping cycle is started, the message, "Tapping cycle will not
be in handwheel mode. Press any key to continue.", will appear.

When switching from the handwheel mode to the automatic mode, the operator will be prompted
to press ‘Cycle Start’.

F5 (MDI) Main-MDI - Manual data input

The F5 (MDI) key from the Main menu selects the MDI (manual data input) function. Through
MDI any programmable machine function can be executed one function or one block at a time.
When MDI is selected the following screen appears.

154
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

As the functions are typed in they will appear on the MDI line at the bottom of the screen. After
the data has been typed in, the ENTER key must be pushed to end the block. At this point a
Cycle Start will execute the MDI line. When MDI is selected any active program will be halted.
During MDI the ESC key will terminate any MDI command. F6 will bring up the normal graphic
displays discussed earlier. During MDI the graphic display will graph all the MDI moves as they
are executed.

155
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

GCODE (MAIN-MDI-MCODE)
GCODE will bring up a list of legal G codes with a short description of each code.

00 Linear Rapid 01 Linear Feed

02 CW Arc 03 CCW Arc
04 Dwell 09 One-Shot Exact Stop
10 Set Data Mode 11 Clear Data Mode
12 Clear Floating Zero 18 ZX Plane
20 English 21 Metric
22 Safe zone check on 23 Safe zone check off
28 Reference Return 29 Return from Reference
30 2nd-4th Ref Return 32 Threading
34 Threading 35 Threading
36 Threading 38 Initial Point Return
39 R-plane return 40 CutterComp Off
41 Left CutterComp On 42 Right CutterComp On
45 Z to Clearance 46 X to Clearance
47 Z to Tool Change 48 X to Tool Change
49 Tool Length Cancel 50 Set FLZ, Max RPM's
52 Local Coordinate 53 Machine Coordinates
54 Worksystem 1 55 Worksystem 2
56 Worksystem 3 57 Worksystem 4
58 Worksystem 5 59 Worksystem 6
60 One-Shot Rapid Move 61 Exact Stop Mode
63 Tapping
64 Cutting mode 65 Move Lockout Block
70 Finish Cycle 71 Rough Turning
72 Rough Facing 73 Pattern Repeat
74 Face Grooving 75 Diameter Grooving
76 Threading Cycle 80 Canned Cycle Cancel
81 Drill Cycle 82 Drill/Dwell
83 Peck/Drill 84 Tap
85 Bore 86 Bore II
89 Bore/Dwell 90 Turning Cycle A
91 Incremental 92 Thread Cutting Cycle
93 Absolute 94 Facing Cycle B
96 Const Surf Speed 97 Revs per Minute
98 Feed per Minute 99 Feed Per Revolution
501 Mirror Image Off 511 Mirror Image On
550 Scaling Off 551 Scaling on
568 Rotation On 569 Rotation Off

Note: The text file that displays the legal G codes on the screen is Gcodes.XXX, where XXX is the
extension for the corresponding language. The control first looks for Gcodes.XXX in the RAM
directory. If not found, it then searches the ROM directory for the file.

156
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

MCODE (MAIN-MDI-MCODE)
MCODE will bring up a list of legal M codes with a short description of each code.

00 Program Stop 01 Optional Stop

02 End of Program 03 Spindle On CW
04 Spindle On CCW 05 Spindle Off
06 Tool Change 08 Coolant on
09 Coolant Off 30 SpindleOff,End of Program
90 Graph Off 91 Graph On
98 Call Program 99 End of Program

Note: The text file that displays the legal M codes on the screen is Mcodes.XXX, where XXX is
the extension for the corresponding language. The control first looks for Mcodes.XXX in the
RAM directory. If not found, it then searches the ROM directory for the file. Depending upon the
machine options, the legal M codes will vary. The Mcodes.XXX in the ROM directory is for a
basic machine with no options.

F6 (Displ) Main-Displ
For F6 (Displ) key, see explanation under Main-Run-Displ on page 146, Section Five. This
function can be entered from several screens.

157
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Parms) Main-Parms
The F7 (Parms) key from the main screen brings up this parameter screen.

F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup
The F1 (Setup) selection brings up the parameters, which make the control unique to a particular
machine or application. When F1 (Level) is selected the following screen appears:

The CNC requires a Validation Code and an Access Level number to allow the machine setup
parameters to be displayed or changed. These are supplied by the machine tool builder and

158
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

should be part of the system parameter setup sheet. Assuming the proper validation code has
been entered, the following screen will appear:

Note: If changes are made to the setup parameters the new parameters should be saved on a
floppy disk for back-up purposes.

159
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec
If the F2 (Prec) selection for Machine Precision is made, the following screen will be displayed:

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

The above screen shows some typical settings for leading and trailing zeroes for the different
coordinate systems. The number of leading and trailing zeroes is unlimited, but some practical
limits do exist. If the numbers get too large they will not fit on the screen in their allotted space,
and if they are smaller than the feedback units they will not cause movement. To change a
parameter push F1 EDIT. A series of arrow keys will be displayed; simply use them to move the
cursor to the desired parameter and type in the new number. Once all the numbers have been
edited, pushing the EXIT key will validate the new numbers and return to the previous screen.
These parameters are for all numbers entered into the control except axis. The axis parameters
are set separately in the F4 (Axis) parameters.

F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power
POWER parameters are parameters which directly relate to the configuration of the machine tool
and will normally be set by the machine tool builder. Changes to these parameters require the
machine to be powered down and back up for the changes to take effect.

Note: When editing or entering parameter values (or any other numeric value on the control),
you can use the built in calculator.

Example: Instead of entering .3750 you may enter 3/8

Instead of entering 1.3750, you may enter 1 + 3/8

160
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

If you want to modify the current value, you may use “.” as the current value.
If the current value is .358 and you want to add .002, type .+.002 (instead of
entering .360).

The F3 key brings up the power-on defaults as shown in the following screen:

Front Panel Type: Standard or Mini-Series Membrane

UL Panel: No or Yes if using an E-stop safety relay

FP Control Port (Cent 7): Front Panel port 1552 for standard Cent 7 systems

Video Mode: Standard settings are 640 x 350 for CRTs and 800 x 600 for LCDs

Initial Units are: G20 English or G21 Metric to power up in inch or metric.

Number of Axes: Can be 1 to 5 (normally 2).

Serial Keyboard : Enables or disables serial keyboard

The keyboard will boot up transmitting over the CLK/DATA interface and not over the RS-232
interface. This means the PC will be able to recognize that a keyboard is present upon reset and
not hang with a message such as, <PRESS F1 TO RESUME>. The keyboard will always
recognize commands over either the RS-232 or CLK/DATA interface. Whenever a valid
command with no error is received over the RS-232 interface, it will start transmitting over the
RS-232 interface and not the CLK/DATA interface.

In like fashion, it is possible to switch back to the CLK/DATA interface. Whenever a valid

161
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

command with no error is received over the CLK/DATA interface, it will start transmitting over
the CLK/DATA interface and not the RS-232 interface.

Since the RS-232 interface is not as interlocked as the CLK/DATA interface, the following
additional requirements are placed on the RS-232 protocol.

1. The system is allowed to send commands only in response to transmissions set by the
keyboard.

2. When the keyboard transmits it will wait for the transmission to be complete and then
delay another two milliseconds before again checking the keystroke buffer. This delay
allows the system time to send a resend command or other command such as turning on a
light. Since transmitting a character takes approximately one millisecond at 9600 baud,
this allows about 1 millisecond processing time for the system.

3. To allow the system a chance to send out commands, the keyboard will send out a strobe
signal periodically. The strobe signal is simply the character EAh. This character will be
transmitted if the keyboard is otherwise idle for approximately 30 milliseconds. The
system can then send out a command in response to the strobe instead of having to wait
until the next keystroke.

Hardware and Software Requirements

The serial keyboard requires a REV E keyboard controller card with firmware version #1.21 or
greater. Firmware for the REV E cards cannot be used with older revision cards and vice versa.

CNC software must be of version # *.86 or greater.

The serial keyboard uses COM2. Therefore, if the serial keyboard is used, the secondary serial
port parameter should be set to none. The secondary serial port parameter may be removed in a
future version.

On machines set up to use the serial keyboard there will be a revised cable in the mag box.
Previously, the cable coming in was split in two and ran to the video card and to the controller
card. Now the cable will split in three and have a 9-pin D-Sub connector to attach to the I/O card.
The connector on the I/O card should be set up to be COM2 (as shipped to us, it is
usually COM1).

Enabling the Serial Keyboard

The CNC program will use the serial keyboard interface if the power-up parameter Serial
Keyboard is set to Yes and if the program is executed without any command line options.

Alternatively, the CNC program will use the serial keyboard interface if the serial keyboard
parameter is set to Yes and the letter "s" appears as an option on the command line.

The serial keyboard is enabled in the following examples if the serial keyboard parameter is also

162
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

set to yes.

CNC
CNC s (serial keyboard only)
CNC fs (front panel lights, serial keyboard)
CNC as (acroloops, serial keyboard)
CNC afs (same as no options)

The serial keyboard is disabled in the following examples:

CNC n (demo mode)

CNC f (front panel lights)
CNC a (acroloops)
CNC af (acroloops and front panel lights)
CNC b (NCB, Cent 6)
CNC bf (NCB and front panel lights)

Spindle Axis: 1 to 5 1=Z and 2=X (Normally 1)

Primary HDW Encoder The encoder to use for the primary handwheel.
Axis (Cent 6 and up) 7 for standard Cent 6 systems, 8 for standard Cent 7 systems.

2nd Handwheel Encoder Used for optional dual hand-wheel systems.

Axis: The number refers to the encoder used for the 2nd hand-wheel.
“000” means there is only one hand-wheel.

Rmt Hdw Encoder Axis1 Used for systems with two remote hand-wheels. This refers to the
(Cent6 and up) encoder to use for the Z-axis.

Rmt Hdw Encoder Axis2 Used for systems with two remote hand-wheels. This refers to the
(Cent6 and up) encoder to use for the Z-axis.

Handheld Rmt Hdw Used for systems with one remote hand-wheel. This refers to the
Encoder (Cent6 and up) encoder to use.

Default Feedrates To Feed Per Rev or Feed Per Minute – specifies which mode the
control is in on power-up.

Default Spindle Speeds To Constant Surface Speed or Revs Per Minute – specifies which
mode the control is in on power-up.

100% Rapid in Run: NO means the feedrate override will affect rapid in the run mode.
(No Override) YES means the feedrate override will not affect rapid in the run
mode.

163
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

100% Rapid in Dry-Run: NO means the feedrate override will affect rapid in the dry run
(No Override) mode.
YES means the feedrate override will not affect rapid in the dry run
mode.

Spindle on in Dry-Run: NO means the spindle will not come on in the dry run mode.
YES means the spindle will come on in the dry run mode.

Don't Load Canned NO means Canned Cycles will be loaded.

Cycles: YES means Canned Cycles will not be loaded. The canned cycles
(drill, tap, groove, etc.) take approximately 14K of RAM.

Block Skip On: If YES the block skip will be active on power up.

Optional Stop On: If YES the optional stop will be active on power up.

Safe Zone On: If Yes the safe zone will be on at power up.
G22 turns the safe zone off.
G23 turns the safe zone on.

Foreign Extensions: Refers to the extension for data files. Current valid extensions are
listed below.

DAT ENGLISH
FRN FRENCH
GRM GERMAN
SPN SPANISH

Half Manual Panel If YES the control will use the front panel for overrides, spindle
CW, Spindle CCW and spindle off.

* * * Tool Changer Information * * *

ATC tool (pocket count): Number of pockets on the tool changer.

Index Tool in HDW: If YES it enables the F4 (T+) and F5 (T-) key in the handwheel
section.

M6 (Tool Change) Macro: Name of the program used for custom M6.

Fast Pragatti Index: YES allows the pragatti indexer to position from a pocket to any
other pocket without stopping at each pocket. If the parameter is
set to NO the indexer will stop at each pocket.

164
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Front turret: YES means the tool will be displayed as coming from the bottom in the
graphics. It also relates to the tool types in the tool table as coming from
the bottom.

Holes in Turret: Used on Dorian tool changer without feedback. The position is verified by
counting holes drilled in a disk mounted to the tool indexer.

Clamp on OD: Used on machines with power chucks. M61 clamps the part, M62
unclamps the part. The parameter determines which way the chuck goes.
M63 commands clamp on OD, M64 commands clamp on ID.

Check Air Pressure: If the parameter is set toYES and the pressure is low (Z input #1) the
machine will E-stop and error 448 “Air Pressure Error. Check air hose
connection.” will occur.

* * * Custom M and G Code Tables * * *

Custom Gcode 09010

Custom Gcode 09011
Custom Gcode 09012 Load the Gcode number into the
Custom Gcode 09013 program # that is the macro for
Custom Gcode 09014 that code.
Custom Gcode 09015

Custom Gcode 09016 It is not possible to have a

Custom Gcode 09017 custom Gcode for G0.
Custom Gcode 09018
Custom Gcode 09019
Custom Mcode 09020 Load the Mcode number into the
Custom Mcode 09021 program # that is the macro for
Custom Mcode 09022 that code.
Custom Mcode 09023
Custom Mcode 09024 It is not possible to have a
Custom Mcode 09025 custom Mcode for M0.
Custom Mcode 09026
Custom Mcode 09027
Custom Mcode 09028
Custom Mcode 09029

The custom code programs can be in the parts directory or the RAM directory. If they are
in both directories the program in the RAM directory takes precedence.

Parameter file version: Should always be 1

Use Small Soft keys: Should be set to no for 12" CRT monitors

165
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Notes on Parameters

Note 1: To change a parameter, press F1 (Edit) and type in the new number.

Note 2: After changing any power parameter, return to the main menu before cycling power.

Note 3: After any power parameter is changed, the machine must be powered down, then up
again. These parameters are only read on power up.

F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis
If the F4 (Axis) is selected, the following screen will be displayed:

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

The PGUP, PGDN and arrow keys move through the tables on the upper display. The lower
display changes to display the data associated with the cursor position of the upper display. To
edit the values in these tables the cursor is positioned via the arrow keys to the desired parameter
in the upper screen. When the EDIT key is pushed the cursor will move to the lower screen. At
this point again move the cursor using the arrow keys to the axis or parameter desired and type in
the new values using the keypad. After the new values have been entered, push the ESC key. The
new value will be entered and the cursor will go back to the upper screen and the selection
process can be started over. Some parameters can be related to the machine position. To edit or
load these parameters, use F5 MACH to load the X and Z positions.

The following is a list of all the selectable parameters displayed in this mode and a description of
their functions.

166
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Axis Address Label ASCII code assigned to each axis.

Z 90.0000
X 88.0000

Pulses Per Unit The number of pulses the feedback gives per unit of travel.
Z + 10000.0000
X + 10000.0000

Encoder Multiplier Sets an internal multiplier on the number of pulses coming from
Z 02.0000 the encoder.
X 01.0000 Param set 0 = 4 times multiplication
Param set 1 = 2 times multiplication
Param set 2 = 1 times multiplication

Home Position The dimension assigned to the machine zero or home position.
Z -10.0000 Normally these are the same as the negative travel of the
X -15.0000 machine.

Home Direction Defines the direction of rotation of the motor when a home is
Z +00.0000 commanded.
X +00.0000
CW = 00.0000
CCW = 01.0000

Velocity Toward Home Sets the feedrate at which an axis seeks the home limit switch.
Z 60.0000
X 10.0000

Velocity Away From Home Sets the velocity at which an axis feeds off the home limit
Z 06.0000 switch.
X 12.0000

Velocity Toward Marker Sets the velocity at which an axis searches for the encoder pulse.
Z 03.0000
X 06.0000

Home Sequence The Home Sequence numbers determine the order the axes will
Z 02.0000 home in: #1 first and #2 next. Axes with the same number home
X 01.0000 together. 0 will cause the axis to not home.

Positive Limit Dimension from machine zero where the positive software limit
Z 00.1000 occurs.
X 00.1500

167
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Negative Limit Dimension from machine zero where the negative software limit
X -31.0000 occurs.
Z -18.0000

Maximum Feed Sets the maximum G01 feedrate in inces per minute or mm per
Z 100.0000 minute.
X 200.0000

Dry Run Feed Sets the Dry Run feedrate in inches per minute or mm per
Z +75.0000 minute.
X 150.0000

Rapid Velocity Set the maximum G00 feedrate in inches per minute or mm per
Z 200.0000 minute.
X 400.0000

Acc/Dec The Acc/Dec is a number that determines the rate at which the
Z 20.0000 axis velocity is increased or decreased for feed moves. The
X 20.0000 smaller the number the longer the Acc/Dec times will be.
Acceleration and deceleration in this control are linear ramps.
Units are in inches per sec².

Rapid Acc/Dec The Rapid Acc/Dec is a number that determines the rate at which
Z 20.0000 the axis velocity is increased or decreased for feed moves. The
X 20.0000 smaller the number the longer the Acc/Dec times will be.
Acceleration and deceleration in this control are linear ramps.
Units are in inches per sec².

Feed S-Curve Acc The units are identical to the (linear) acc/dec. These ramps
(Cent 7 and up) are used when the s-curves are enabled in feed moves.

Rapid S-Curve Acc The units are identical to the (linear) rapid acc/dec. These
(Cent 7 and up) ramps are used when the s-curves are enabled in rapid moves.

Slow Jog Velocity

Z 02.0000 Velocity in IPM or MMPM
X 04.0000

Fast Jog Velocity

Z 200.0000 Velocity in IPM or MMPM
X 400.0000

Jog Key Direction Sets whether the Jog is related to moving the table or
Z 01.0000 moving the tool. A “1” reverses the direction
X 00.0000

168
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

In Position Sets the distance in feedback units from the destination point
Z 00.0100 where other axes will start their movement. In inches or metric.
X 00.0200

G00 Unidirectional Sets the distance in inches or mm which an axis will go past the
X 00.0000 destination point in one direction before reversing direction so
Z 00.0000 that the machine will always position from the same direction.
Active only in G00 mode.

P1 P2

Uni-distance

G60 Unidirectional Same as G00 unidirectional except only active in a G60 block.
Z 00.0000
X 00.0000

Backlash Sets the distance in inches or mm which the control will

Z 00.0006 compensate for lost motion whenever an axis reversal takes
X 00.0009 place. Active in all modes.

Excess Error Sets the distance in inches or mm the machine can lag behind
Z 00.2000 the CNC before the CNC will shut the system down due to an
X 00.4000 excess following error condition. 00.0000 = will never force an
excess error.

Rotary=0 Linear=1 Sets whether an axis should be treated as circular or linear.

Z 01.0000 In circular the feedrate is interpreted as degrees per minute rather
X 01.0000 than IPM or mm per minute.

Handwheel Normal=0 A “1” will reverse the direction of the handwheel.

Invert = 1

English Leading Sets the number of characters to the left of the decimal point for
Z 02.0000 the inch system, for the specified axis only.
X 02.0000

English Trailing Sets the number of characters to the right of the decimal point
Z 04.0000 for the inch system, for the specified axis only.
X 04.0000

169
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Metric Leading Same as English Leading except for the metric case.
Z 03.0000
X 03.0000

Metric Trailing Same as English Trailing except for the metric case.
X 03.0000
Z 03.0000

Home Switch=0 Marker=1 Sets whether an axis will seek a home limit switch and then the
Z 00.0000 marker pulse, or just seek the nearest marker pulse.
X 00.0000

Max Handwheel Error When the excess error reaches this value, pulses from the
Z 00.2000 handwheel are ignored. Error is specified in inches or mm.
X 00.4000

Tool Change X moves to this location on a G48 (X to toolchange) or M6

Z 00.0000 (toolchange) command. Z moves to this location on a G47 Z to
X 00.0000 tool change. This position is specified in inches or mm and is
relative to the home zero.

Gain Proportional (KP) KP is in units of DAC steps per count of following error.
Z + 08.0000
X + 08.0000

Gain Velocity (KV) KV is in units of DAC steps per unit of velocity. These units
Z + 250.0000 units assume a 16 bit (1 bit sign, 15 bits magnitude) DAC,
X + 250.0000 although the lower four bits are not actually significant. The units
of velocity in this case are counts/heartbeat, one heartbeat being
3/4096th of a second. Larger values reduce the following error.
Reasonable values are between 50 and 327.

Handwheel Gain (KP) Same as proportional. Smaller values are used to soften the
Z 04.0000 handwheel motion. Reasonable values are between 2 and 8.
X 04.0000

170
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc
The F5 (Misc) key brings up some miscellaneous setup parameters dealing with the spindle,
software options and M codes. When MISC is selected the following screen appears:

Miscellaneous parameters are edited similarly to the POWER parameters. The following is a list
and short description of the MISC parameters.

Basic Machine Info

Machine Type Type in ML18, etc.

Machine Version The current model

Force FP Spindle Yes for older style Centurion Vs that output the spindle
analog from the front panel.

Mechanical Version The current mechanical version

Electrical version The current electrical version

Machine serial number The machine serial number

Check Up to Speed On (M3/M4) the control will wait for up-to-speed signal
from the spindle controller before continuing on M3
(spindle CW) or M4 (spindle CCW). From rapids to feeds,
it waits for the up to speed whenever it switches from G0 to
G1. This works well when using constant surface speed.

Up to Speed Axis Specifies the axis for the up to speed signal.

171
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Up to Speed Input Specifies the input for the up to speed signal.

Check Zero Speed (M5) Control will wait for zero speed signal from the spindle
controller before continuing on M5 (spindle off)

Spindle Encoder PPU Pulses per rev of spindle, used for tapping, threading and
feed per rev.

Handwheel Encoder PPU Pulses per rev of the handwheel, should be 400 for current
systems

Spindle Range 1 Max spindle speed for gear 1

Spindle Range 2 Max spindle speed for gear 2

.
.
.
Spindle Range 8 Max spindle speed for gear 8

Spindle Range Which range the spindle is in: 1 to 8. Scaled assumes the
range based on the programmed spindle speed and puts out
the appropriate voltage.

Maximum Spindle Speed This will clamp the overall spindle speed. It is used to limit
the RPM's in high gear while still getting a large range of
speeds in lower gears.

TAP Spindle Ramp Time 1 (sec) The tapping deceleration point is adjusted based on spindle
RPM, pitch, and spindle ramp time so as not to overshoot
the programmed depth. It relates to the time in seconds to
decelerate the spindle to 0 RPM’s from full RPM’s in gear
1.

TAP Spindle Ramp Time 2 (sec) The tapping deceleration point is adjusted based on spindle
RPM, pitch, and spindle ramp time so as not to overshoot
the programmed depth. It relates to the time in seconds to
decelerate the spindle to 0 RPM’s from full RPM’s in gear
2.

2 Gear Yaskawa M5 Yes for newer M5 spindle drives with 2 gear spindle
Spindle Motor motors. The spindle does not need to stop to shift.

Hard Tap Fudge Factor Used to adjust the depth of rigid tapping cycle. Higher
numbers will decrease the amount of overshoot at the

172
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

bottom of the hole.

Spindle Acceleration Time (Sec) Amount of time from zero speed to full speed.

Spindle Deceleration Time (Sec) Amount of time from zero speed to full speed.

Lube Pump Time (Sec) Time for the lube pump to stay on.
(Cent 6 and up)

Lube Cycle Time (Sec) Time for the lube pump to stay off.
(Cent 6 and up)

Check Spindle In Gear If set to Yes the control will monitor the in-gear proxes
(Cent 6 and up) while the spindle is running. If the spindle comes out of
gear the control will E-stop the machine and give an error
message.

Back Gear Reverse Used for machines that need to reverse the spindle motor to
get the correct spindle direction. The control looks at the 3rd
axis input # 9.

Multi Geared Spindle If set to Yes the control will display the gear that the spindle
is in.

Omatech Used for the Standard Modern, Kestral or Omatec lathes to

adjust for different I/O.

Keyboard Code 015 for systems with a CAT900 card, 0 for others

CPU Code Not Used

Yaskawa Drives Yes, if it has Yaskawa drives (Yaskawa drives give a drive
OK signal instead of a drive fault signal)

Feedhold G1 and No Spindle If set to Yes and the spindle is off during a feed move, the
control will feedhold the machine and display a message
“Spindle Stopped → Feedhold” If you start the spindle, you
can resume the program (Feed hold off…Cycle start…esc
to clear the message)

Door Open Switch See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

European Code See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

173
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Auger Aux (Cent 7 and up) Any Aux parameter can be assigned to one of the Aux
Setup Aux (Cent 7 and up) buttons on the front panel. There can be up to 7 Aux
Spindle Jog Aux (Cent 7 and up) buttons. Example: to assign the spindle jog to the Aux
button #4, enter 004 into the Spindle Jog Aux parameter.

Door Open Axis See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
Door Open Input section.

Door Open Jog If set to Yes allows the operator to jog the spindle with the
door open using either the Spindle Jog Aux button or the
button defined by the Jog Override Axis and Jog Override
Input.

Jog Override Axis Defines which input is the Jog spindle button.
Jog Override Input

Spindle Jog Speed Defines what RPM the spindle jogs at.

Chip remove On (min) Amount of time the chip conveyor stays on after started.
(Cent 6 and up)

Wash Down On (sec) The wash down cycles on and off while the chip conveyor
(Cent 6 and up) is running.
Wash Down Off (sec) These times define the on and off times.
(Cent 6 and up)

Aux Safety Interlock Axis See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

Aux Safety Interlock Input See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

DoorOpen OverRide Axis See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

DoorOpen OverRide Input See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

Check Chiller Fault Used for chiller faults. If set to Yes, the control will display
a message “Chiller Fault. Press <Esc> to clear this
message.” when the input is set. The control will shut off
the spindle and feedhold the axes.

Chiller Fault Axis Defines the input to check for chiller faults.
Chiller Fault Input

174
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Max Feed with Door Open (ipm) See notes on European code (page 181) at the end of this
section.

Soft Start Delay (secs) No keystrokes are allowed during this delay. The delay is
meant to allow the drives to engage before the operator
tries to move an axis after resetting.

Digital Readout in E-Stop If Yes the axis position display will be updated even when
emergency-stopped.

Probe Axis and Probe Designates which axis and input number for the Probe 1
Input and Probe 2 commands to use.

Cranking Minutes/Rev How many minutes of normal program execution time

correspond to one turn of the handwheel. Multiplying an
IPM feed time, this factor results in an IPR feed (inches per
turn of the handwheel). This parameter should be
approximately 0.0010 for our current systems.

Cranking Factor This is the defined multiplier for each handwheel click. It
should be set to approx. 100.
For lathe IPR mode:
Cranking Factor = X * IPR Scale * (Resolution Spindle) /
(Resolution Handwheel); e.g., if X = 10, one turn of the
handwheel will have the same effect as would ten turns of
the spindle.
If X = 10 is desired, then
Resolution Spindle = 4000
Resolution Handwheel = 400
IPR Scale = 1
Then Cranking Factor = 100

For IPM mode, this parameter has less intuitive meaning;

however, Cranking Factor / Cranking Mins Per Rev is
proportional to the max feedrate allowed while
handcranking.

Cranking Max IPM This limits the feedrate while hand-cranking to get
reasonable response at slow programmed feedrates.
Adjusting the other parameters can give excess errors on
rapids. This parameter should be approximately 100 for our
current systems.

175
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Max Corner Deviation This number sets the maximum deviation allowed on a
(Cent 6 and up) corner. A value of .001 means the machine will slow down
when approaching a corner by more than .001".

Min Block Time (sec) If the time to execute a move is less than this value, the
control will slow the feedrate down in an effort to forestall
jerky motions from data starvation.

End-of-Cycle Axis and These two parameters define which output will be
End-of-Cycle Outputs used for the End-of-Cycle Light.

The end of cycle light does not need to be programmed. The light will come on anytime there is
no motion and a program is running and at the end of a program. This would be the case for
block stops, waiting for tool change reset, etc. The light goes off when any key is pressed or
motion recommences. The light may illuminate during dwells, automatic tool changes, orienting,
and etcetera, but it will shut off when the machine recommences motion.

IPR Scale This allows a higher max IPR than normal, e.g., a factor of
two doubles the range at the expense of halving the normal
max spindle rate. This should normally be 0 (which is
equivalent to 1). Some applications may require a 2.

Two Handwheel Timing Handwheel Timing is the minimum time in units of 500 μs
(microseconds) it takes to calculate a two handwheel move.
This is in addition to the time needed to communicate with
the acroloops which is already taken in to account. This
parameter is dependent upon cpu processor speed, and may
require some trial and error for setting.

176
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Check Spindle Speed/ Checks to see if the RPM exceeds the spindle range.
Gear Mismatch Operators shift the lathe into a higher gear without telling
(M4#) the control. The RPM is based on the lower spindle
range. This causes the spindle to run at much higher RPM's
than it should. If the RPM is more than 120% of the Max
RPM for a given gear, the control will E-stop the machine
and display a message "Spindle speed out of range for
gear".

Software Options
Sharp Corners No will cause all corners to be rounded to a miximum
specifed by max corner deviation.
Yes will round the corers proportionally to the feedrate. Full
feedrate will round the corers by the max corner deviation
parameters. Slower federates will reduce the deviation.

Security Code # 0 (S-Curves) Secret code to enable S-curves

Use S-curves Yes to enable S-curves for acceleration and deceleration.

(Cent 7 and up)

Security Code #1 (Pay Timer) Secret code to override and expired pay timer.

Look Ahead Specifies the number of axis moves the control can see
(Cent 6 and up) ahead, which enables the control to prepare for sharp
corners or features that could otherwise be rounded off
when feedrates are increased.

Note: Look Ahead is always active in DNC-fast mode. Valid values are between 10 and 255.

Look Ahead in Run Mode Enables the look ahead feature for Run mode.

Max graph file size Limits the amount of graphics on the screen. 30,000 for
standard systems

Minimum Parts Space If the parts space is less than the parameter value in KB, the
system will go to the erase screen each time a key is
pressed on the main menu.

Special Flags Bit 1 (#1) puts a circle the size of the tool nose radius on
the graphics screen when plotting the tool.
Bit 2 (#2) will shut off trig help.
Bit 3 (#3) will shut off cutter compensation.

Screen Blank Time (min) Time in minutes to blank the screen if no key is pressed

177
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Flat Screen Blank Yes for CRTs. Some flat screens take too long to refresh if
the parameter is set to Yes.

Use FLZ instead of G54 Used for setting work offset in jog and handwheel mode.
Yes means use FLZ (G92 offsets). No means use G54
offsets.

Tool Setting If set to any tool the jog and handwheel tool setting
routines will prompt the operator for the tool # being set. If
it is set to current tool the control will assume the active
tool # is the one that is being set.

Extract Input Programs If set to Yes, the control will extract programs based on
0###'s in file loaded from the floppy drive (remote files
path) or received in RS-232. Duplicate programs are
overwritten without prompting the operator.

Restrictive Edit Key If the parameter is set to Yes and the edit key is on then:
From the main menu you can select F2 (Jog), F3 (HDW),
or F4 (Run). In Jog you can only select F1 (Slow) or F2
(Fast). In HDW you can only select X, Y, Z, A or B axis. In
Run you can only select F1 (Start) – F2 (Old) or F7
(Menu). The F3 (Block), F4 (OStop) and F5 (BSkip) are
only displayed. They cannot be changed.

Resolve DNC programs If Yes, goto's can be used in DNC, Run, or DNC Verf.

Full Dos File Names If Yes, eleven character DOS file names
[FILENAME.EXT] may be used. Pressing the “D” key on
any menu toggles the Full Dos File Names parameter.

Disable 417 Errors If Yes, parameters may be modified while a program is

running or verifying. If No, an error 417 will be given when
attempting to modify a parameter while a program is
running.

Multiple Block Display If Yes, the current block being executed plus the next seven
blocks will be displayed when programs are running.

CAD Parameters
CAD Type is, DXF, CDL CAD file type to import in conversational programming.

CAD Epsilon Tolerance for geometry intersections of imported CAD

files.

178
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Post M codes Table

Post M code #0
Post M code #1
Post M code #2
Post M code #3
Post M code #4 M codes listed here will be executed
Post M code #5 after all other operations within
Post M code #6 the block.
Post M code #7
Post M code #8
Post M code #9

Report File DOS file names to write DPRINT text to when using
POPEN P0

Command Name Any string in this parameter will show up on the F10 (Util)
key. Pressing F10 will execute the DOS file associated with
the command name. See page 232, Section Six for more
information on this feature.

PULSEX pulse delay (MS) Msec pulse time used with PULSE0 and PULSE1

Spindle Power Monitoring

Spindle Power Raw Value read from ADC, 0 to 255

Spindle Power Scale Multiplier to obtain Spindle Power Value

Spindle Power Value (AMPS) Calculated from the spindle power raw and scale

179
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

*** Manual Spindle OverRide Speeds ***

Manual Spindle Speed 00
Manual Spindle Speed 01 In manual mode these parameters specify the spindle speeds for each spindle override position. The parameters specify
Manual Spindle Speed 02 RPMs, Feet per Minute or Meters per Minute depending on what mode the control is in.
Manual Spindle Speed 03
Manual Spindle Speed 04
Manual Spindle Speed 05 The spindle speeds are treated differently if the there is a spindle over ride on the manual panel
Manual Spindle Speed 06
Manual Spindle Speed 07 Overides on the manual panel, Inch Mode, Constant Surface Speed <-- uses the table values (Feet per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 08 Overides on the manual panel, Inch Mode, Revs per Minute <-- uses the table values (Revs per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 09 Overides on the manual panel, Metric Mode, Constant Surface Speed <-- uses the table values (Meters per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 10 Overides on the manual panel, Metric Mode, Revs per Minute <-- uses the table values (Revs per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 11 Overides on the front panel, Inch Mode, Constant Surface Speed <-- uses a % of Manual Spindle Speed 10 (Feet per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 12 Overides on the front panel, Inch Mode, Revs per Minute <-- uses a % of Manual Spindle Speed 10 (Revs per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 13 Overides on the front panel, Metric Mode, Constant Surface Speed <-- uses a % of Manual Spindle Speed 10 (Meters per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 14 Overides on the front panel, Metric Mode, Revs per Minute <-- uses a % of Manual Spindle Speed 10 (Revs per Min)
Manual Spindle Speed 15

*** Manual FeedRate OverRide IPM's ***

Manual Feed IPM 00
Manual Feed IPM 01 In manual mode these parameters specify the feedrate for each feedrate override position.
Manual Feed IPM 02 The parameters are in inches per minute and represent how fast the machine will jog when the
Manual Feed IPM 03 spindle is off.
Manual Feed IPM 04
Manual Feed IPM 05 The feedrate are treated differently if there is a feedrate over ride on the manual panel.
Manual Feed IPM 06
Manual Feed IPM 07 Overides on the manual panel, Inch Mode <-- uses the table values (Inches per Minute)
Manual Feed IPM 08 Overides on the manual panel, Metric Mode <-- uses the table values times 25.4 (MM per Minute)
Manual Feed IPM 09 Overides on the front panel, Inch Mode <-- uses a % of Manual Feed IPM 12 (Inches per Minute)
Manual Feed IPM 10 Overides on the front panel, Metric Mode <-- uses Manual Feed IPM 12 times 25.4 (MM per Minute)
Manual Feed IPM 11
Manual Feed IPM 12
Manual Feed IPM 13
Manual Feed Rapid
Manual Feed Rapid

*** Manual FeedRate OverRide IPR's ***

Manual Feed IPR 00
Manual Feed IPR 01 In manual mode these parameters specify the feedrate for each feedrate override position.
Manual Feed IPR 02 The parameters are in inches per rev and represent how fast the machine will jog when the
Manual Feed IPR 03 spindle is on.
Manual Feed IPR 04
Manual Feed IPR 05 The feedrate are treated differently if there is a feedrate over ride on the manual panel.
Manual Feed IPR 06
Manual Feed IPR 07 Overides on the manual panel, Inch Mode <-- uses the table values (Inches per Rev)
Manual Feed IPR 08 Overides on the manual panel, Metric Mode <-- uses the table values times 25.4 (MM per Rev)
Manual Feed IPR 09 Overides on the front panel, Inch Mode <-- uses a % of Manual Feed IPR 10 (Inches per Rev)
Manual Feed IPR 10 Overides on the front panel, Metric Mode <-- uses Manual Feed IPR 10 times 25.4 (MM per Rev)
Manual Feed IPR 11
Manual Feed IPR 12
Manual Feed IPR 13
Manual Feed Rapid
Manual Feed Rapid

*** Manual Threading Data ************

Manual1stDepth
ManualMinCut Specifies the 1st cut amount for the manual treading cycle
ManualFinPasses Specifies the minimum cut amount for the manual treading cycle
Specifies the number of finish passes for the manual treading cycle

180
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions

Door Open Switch Enables the door open switch

European Code Enables the door open button

Door-Open Axis The axis # that the Door-Input-Switch goes into

Door-Open Input The input # that the Door-Input-Switch goes into

Aux Safety Interlock Axis The axis # that the Aux Safety Interlock into

Aux Safety Interlock Input The input # that the Aux Safety Interlock into

Door-Open/Override Axis The axis # that the Door-Open/Override Button goes into

Door-Open/Override Input The input # that the Door-Open/Override Button goes into

Max Feed with Door Open The maximum speed the machine can move with the door
open with the Door-Override Button pressed

The software that relates to European codes concerns a safety door open switch. Below is a
description of how the software operates relating to the software parameters.

If only the door open switch is enabled

When the door opens, it shuts the spindle off and feedholds the machine. When the door is open,
the spindle will not start. When the door is open, the machine will not do an MDI move, will not
jog, and will not do a move in run mode; however, it will handwheel. The machine will do I/O
related functions other than turning on the spindle (i.e. arm-in, drawbar, etc.) If the machine is
tapping and the doors open, the machine will finish the tap, feedhold, and stop the spindle.

If the doors are opened while the machine is running:

1 The spindle will shut off.
2 The axis will stop moving.
3 The feedhold light will come on.
4 The spindle will not restart. But you can hold the spindle jog button (or the
spindle Jog Aux key) to turn the spindle on at a slow feed rate.

To continue operation:
1 Close the doors (Cycle Start will flash).
2 Push the CW button on the front panel (the spindle will restart).
3 Push the Cycle Start Button on the front panel (Cycle Start will stop flashing
and the Feedhold light will go out).

If the machine is not running and the spindle is not running, opening the doors should have no
effect on the machine. However, the Feedhold light will come on. The spindle will not start. But

181
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

you can hold the spindle jog button (or the spindle Jog Aux key) to turn the spindle on at a slow
feed rate.

If the door open switch is enabled and the European code is enabled
When the door opens, which does so by pressing the door open button, the spindle shuts off as
well as feed holds the machine. When the door is open, the spindle will not start. When the door
is open, the machine will not do an MDI command; it will not jog, it will not start running a
program and it will not hand wheel. If the machine is tapping and the doors open, the machine
will finish the tap and then feed hold and stop the spindle.

If the door is open and Setup is held in, the machine will jog up to the Max Feed with Door
Open (ipm) parameter.

If the door is open and Setup is held in, the machine will hand wheel up to the 70% rate on the
feed rate override switch, which is 2mm per click of the hand wheel. (It is difficult to generate
speeds greater than 1000 mmpm in this mode). Modifying the distance per click of the hand
wheel also requires a password available only to the machine builder.

If the doors are opened while the machine is running:

1 The spindle will shut off.
2 The axis will stop moving.
3 The feed-hold light will come on.
4 The spindle will not restart. But you can hold the spindle jog button (or the
spindle Jog Aux key) to turn the spindle on at a slow feed rate.

If Setup is held in, the machine will move at a clamped feed rate
If Setup is held in, the spindle can be turned on.

To continue operation:
1 Close the doors (the Cycle Start Button will flash).
2 Push the CW button on the front panel (the spindle will restart).
3 Push the Cycle Start Button on the front panel (the Cycle Start Button will stop
flashing and the feed hold light will go out).

The Aux Safety Interlock switch is not active unless the eauropean code is set to yes and both
the Aux Safety Interlock Axis and the Aux Safety Interlock Input are not zero. If the input is
made the control will be forced into block mode.

Note: The spindle will not run under any circumstances if the chuck guard is open

182
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-Ovrs-FdOvr
The F4 (FdOvr) key brings up the feedrate override parameter settings. These settings determine
which percentage will be used for each of the 16 feedrate override switch positions. (i.e. entry 5-
040 means 40% at 5th position, 1 is 0%, 2 is 10%, 3 is 20% . . . 16 is 150%) The following
screen is displayed when F4 (FdOvr) is selected. To edit the parameters, select EDIT and move
the cursor to the value to be changed. Type in the desired change and hit ESC. The maximum
feedrate override setting is 199.

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

183
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-Ovrs-HwOvr
The F5 (HwOvr) key brings up the handwheel switch settings for the feedrate override switch.
These settings determine how far an axis will move for one increment of the handwheel (001=1
pulse). Editing is performed the same way as the feedrate override parameters. The following
screen displays the Handwheel Override Settings.

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

184
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-Ovrs-SpOvr
The F6 (SpOvr) key brings up the 16 spindle override switch settings. These settings are the
percentages a spindle command will be overridden at each switch position. The spindle override
parameters are changed the same as the feedrate override parameters. The Spindle Override
screen is displayed below.

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

185
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (BScrw) Main-Parms-Setup-BScrw

Ball Screw Compensation Table Creation Help

Type X or Z to select the axis.

F1 (NEW) creates a new, zero ball screw table
F2 (ON) turns ball screw comp on for given axis
F3 (OFF) turns ball screw comp off for given axis
F4 (LOAD) loads the ball screw table into the axis
F5 (GAP) change gap
F6 (EDIT) jumps into editor with ball screw table
F7 (4<>6) chooses 4 or 6 decimal places.
ESC DONE

Note: Ball screw compensation is turned on after homing the machine if a ball screw
compensation table is present.

F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-Dos
F9 (DOS) will EXIT the CNC software and return to the DOS prompt.

186
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord
The F2 (Coord) key off the parameter screen brings up the parameters dealing with the various
coordinate systems in the control.

To edit the work coordinate parameters use the PGUP, PGDN and arrow keys to position the
cursor to the correct parameter, and then push the EDIT key and arrow to the desired axis. Type
in the new values and push ESC.

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

Operation of the Work Coordinate Systems, G50 and G52, was discussed in the G Code section.
These parameters are positions relative to the machine zero and will become the new zero point
when they are used. The F5 (Mach) key in the edit mode enters the current machine position as
the work coordinate zero point for X and Z axes.

187
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The next page of this display contains parameters for:

Positive Safe Zone A position relative to machine zero which, along with the
Z 00.0000 negative safe zone position, describes a box which the tool
X 00.0000 cannot enter.

Negative Safe Zone If the tool is programmed into this box an error will be
Z 00.0000 displayed.
X 00.0000

G28 Reference Point 1

G30 Reference Point 2 Are described in the G Code section.
G30 Reference Point 3
G30 Reference Point 4

F3 (Tool) Main-Parms-Tool
The F3 (Tool) key brings up the following screen.

Keys displayed in the Edit Mode:

188
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The editing on this screen is similar to all the other Parms screens. The tool length offsets
normally set in the handwheel, can be modified in the tool table. The tool radius and types can
only be set in the tool table. Tool types are changed by pushing F1 (Tool>). There are 24 sets of
tool numbers and offsets which can be accessed. The tool types are:

Note: The above tool displays are for a system with the front turret parameter set to NO.

F4 (Wear) Main-Parms-Wear
The F4 (Wear) key brings up the following screen.

Keys displayed in the edit mode:

Editing the wear offsets is similar to all other PARMS screens. When a tool length offset is set
via the handwheel screen, the corresponding wear offset is zeroed. There are no provisions for
zeroing the wear offset radii. The operator should zero these when he enters the new values in
the tool table. The actual offset is the sum of the values in the tool table and the wear offset table.
There are 24 sets of tool wear offsets that can be accessed.

189
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save
The F6 (Save) key saves the RAM files to a floppy disk (includes parameters, ball screw files,
etc.).

F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load
The F7 (Load) key loads RAM files from a floppy disk (includes parameters, ball screw files,
etc.).

F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog
This set of parameters gives the machine programmer access to all the internal parameters the
CNC is using to execute a program. Normally these parameters would be used for display
purposes only or as an aid to program debugging. However it is possible to read and change
these parameters in a parametric program. Great care must be taken when doing this because
these parameters are used directly by the CNC to produce the next machine movement or
function. These parameters are displayed and edited in the same manner as the coordinate
parameters. The following is a list and description of these parameters.

P200 thru P207 Contains the previous programmed position relative to the current
work offsets of each axis.
P200=Z P201=X . . . etc.

P208 thru P215 Contains the current programmed position relative to the current work
offsets of each axis.
P208=Z P209=X . . . etc.

P216 thru P223 Contains the previous machine position relative to the machine zero
of each axis.
P216=Z P217=X . . . etc.

P224 thru P231 Contains the current machine position relative to the machine zero of
each axis.
P224=Z P225=X . . . etc.

P232 thru P239 Contains the work coordinate offset relative to the machine zero of
each axis.
P232=Z P233=X . . . etc.

P240 thru P247 Contains the active tool length (H) parameter for each axis.
P240=Z P241=X . . . etc.

P248 Contains the current arc radius

P249 Contains the current arc K value (Z center)

P250 Contains the current arc I value (X center)

190
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

P251 Current feedrate in feed per minute or feed per revolution

P252 Current dwell time

P253 Current programmed spindle speed in revolutions per minute or

constant surface speed

P254 Thru P259 Last Z, X . . . etc. valves executed

P260 Contains active tool number

P261 Contains active tool nose radius

P262 Contains active tool shape

P266 Contains safe zone status

P267 Contains ratio of feedback pulses to program units (English or

Metric). If the control is in Inch mode, P267 is 1, if it is in Metric
mode, P267 is .03937…

P268 Pending tool number

P270, P271 Last KI values executed (Arc center)

P298 Max spindle speed clamped for constant surface speed. 0 is not in
data mode, 1 is in data mode.

P304 Status if control is in data mode or normal programming

P306 Status of 0=G0, 1=G1, 2=G2, 3=G3 mode

P309 Cutter comp. status 0=G40, 1=G41, 2=G42

P310 Current active canned cycle number: 0=Cancelled, 1=Drill,

2=Drill/Dwl, 3=Peck I, 4=Tap, 5=Bore, 6=Bore II, 7=Face Grooving,
8=Diameter Grooving, 9=Bore/Dwl, 11=Single Turn, 12=Single
Face, 13=Single Thread, 14=Multiple Thread, 15=Threading

P311 0 = Absolute, 1 = Incremental mode

P312 Feed Unit 0=Feed per minute

1=Feed per revolution

P313 Spindle Unit 0=revolutions per minute

1-Constant surface speed

191
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

P315 0 = Inches, 1 = Metric dimensions

P316 Scaling - 0 = Off, 1 = On

P317 Rotation – 0 = Off, 1 = On

P318 Mirror image – 0 = Off, 1 = On

P319 Current work coordinate number – 1 = G54, 2 = G55…6 = G59

P323 0 = Return to R-plane (G39), 1 = Initial Level (G38)

P324 Tapping mode – 0 = Off, 1 = On

P365 Last feed per minute feedrate executed

P366 Last feed per revolution feedrate executed

P367 Last RPM spindle speed executed

P368 Last CSS spindle speed executed

P370 True tool number used for tool changers

Block Rate Average time in seconds per block of the last program run or
verified.

F9 (Ctrl) Main-Parms-Ctrl
This set of parameters is an extension of the Prog parameters. This group deals primarily with
parameters used to create the autoroutine and canned cycles. These parameters can be accessed
and changed the same as all other parameters in the control. The following is a list and
description of these parameters. All coordinates in these parameters are relative to the current
work coordinate system.

New Thread Crest

Notes on the multiple pass thread cycle (G76)
The multiple pass thread cycle has been modified to work slightly different based on a
parameter. The CTRL parameter “New Thread Crest” affects the depth of threads when using
Crest option on the Multiple Thread Cutting cycle. A Unified-UNC, UNF thread is shown in
diagram 1. Notice that there is a flat on the top and on the bottom of the thread. To obtain the flat
on the bottom of the thread the tool would require that the tool have the flat specified for each
specific pitch thread. In many cases the tool being used has a sharp tip. If a sharp tip tool is used,
it is necessary to cut to the (theoretical) root diameter shown in diagram 2 to obtain the thread
dimensions (except for the bottom flat).

192
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

With our thread cycle, there had been some confusion on which dimension is the crest. In most
cases the operator entered the Actual Thread Diameter. This caused the thread to be cut too deep.
With this CTRL parameter “New Thread Crest” set to Yes, the control will assume the dimension
is the Actual Thread Diameter and cut the appropriate thread. With the parameter set to No the
control will cut the same as it had in the past.

Another issue was with internal threads. When a customer entered a crest diameter he usually
was entering the Actual Thread Diameter. We assumed he was entering the theoretical root
diameter. This caused the thread to be cut way too deep. With the CTRL parameter “New Thread
Crest” set to Yes the control will assume the dimension is the Actual Thread Diameter and cut
the appropriate thread.

All new machines will ship with the parameter set to Yes.

When using Root and Height, there was some confusion with our thread cycle on which
dimension is the root. Most thread tables specify the Actual Root Diameter as the root diameter.
If an operator enters the Actual Root Diameter as the root diameter and he is using a sharp nosed
tool the machine will not cut deep enough. No changes on the Root and Height portion of the
Thread Cutting Cycle were made.

193
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Spindle Range Which gear range the spindle is in.

Sort Directories by Name If Yes, it sorts the menus alphabetical by the 1st line of the
program. Note: pressing “N” on any menu will toggle this
parameter.

Drive Key on Menus If Yes, the help key allows the operator to select a new drive for
the menu. It allows the operator to select a new directory for
the menu

Handwheel G5x on If set to Yes the G5x-z key will only be active on the tool #1.
Tool 1 only This forces the operator to use tool #1 as the master tool.

194
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Ignore Tool too Large Errors If Yes, the control will ignore 569 errors and cut a corner when
compensated arcs are too small.

X Axis Wear Offsets By Radius or Diameter, Refers to the values in the tool wear table.

Pre Check Software Limits Never, Run Only, or Always. Never: the control never checks
the soft limits. Previous versions of the software acted this
way. The soft limit error only occurs when the axis moves
outside the limits. Run Only: checks are not made when
verifying. When running it will check to see if any axis is
going to move outside the limits before the move starts. The
graphics will show the move but the machine will not make the
move. This can prevent crashes where faster moves go beyond
the limits. Prior versions would rapid to the limit and would be
unable to stop before the limit switch and/or hard stop. Always:
the control will check to see if any axis is going to move
outside the limits when running or verifying. The graphics will
show the move, but the machine will not make the move. It
may be useful to verify a program before running it.

% of Feed on Ruff Infeeds Feed modes in Ruff Turning (G71) and Ruff Facing (G72) that
are cutting into the part can have the feedrate reduced.
Example: 40.0000 will reduce these feedrate to 40% of the
original programmed feedrate.

Serial Port Data

Note: Com port, baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits are communications parameters. See
page 221, Section Five on F4 (RS232) for more information.

Primary Serial Port NONE, COM1, or COM2

COM1 Baud Rate 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200

COM1 Parity, Data N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, E/7/2, E/8/1,
and Stop Bits E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2

COM2 Baud Rate 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

COM2 Parity, Data N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, E/7/2, E/8/1,
and Stop Bits E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2

Secondary Serial Port NONE, COM1, or COM2

Tape Start Character ASCII value used to send when opening a com port

195
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Tape Stop Character ASCII value used to send when closing a com port

RS232 Buffer Size 1 for users not doing long RS-232 communications, up to 255 to
improve RS-232 in DNC

LF in change to CR Yes means change all carriage returns received on RS-232 to line
feeds

End of Block Send Yes means send a carriage return/line feed at the end of blocks sent
CR/LF out on the RS-232

RS232 EOF Character ASCII value of character sent at end file sent on RS-232

Tool Setter Parameters

P132 Z+ Values are written to these parameters by the tool setting
P133 X+ calibration cycle. They are then used by the tool setting macro for
P134 Z- contact tool setters.
P135 X-

Bar Feed Parameters

P500/P501 – X/Z X & Z position for part stop to wait for the intial bar push.
Feeder stop position

P502 – Feeder Z position to stop bar at for machining operation.

Machine position

P503/P504 X/Z remnant X/Z position for the part stop to move to when ejecting a bar
Reject position remnant.

P505 Number of parts in Bar

Bar Feed Cycle explanation:

When an M23 (bar feed M code) is commanded the CNC will position the X & Z to the feeder
stop position and open the chuck/collet (assuming the correct tool # for the part stop is active).
The bar feed will push the bar against the stop and send a pressure signal to the CNC. When
the pressure signal is received the CNC will advance the Z axis to the Feeder Machine
Position, the bar feed will keep pressure on the bar and advance it with the Z axis. After
reaching the Feeder Machine Position the Z axis will position positive .05” from this position.

If the CNC receives an end of bar signal from the bar feeder, it will position to the X & Z
remnant reject position and wait until the remnant is ejected from the spindle and a new bar is
loaded into the spindle.

Addition Control Parameters

P100 Thread Variable Lead
P101 Thread Lead

196
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

P102 Thread Start Shift Angle

P103 Thread Chamfer Length
P104 Thread Chamfer Angle
P105 Thread Type
P106 Thread Height
P107 1st Thread Cut Depth
P108 Tool Nose Angle
P110 Start Block of Rough, Repeat and Finish Cycles
P111 End Block of Rough, Repeat and Finish Cycles
P112 X Finish Stock of Rough, and Repeat Cycles
P113 Z Finish Stock of Rough, and Repeat Cycles
P114 X Rough Stock of Rough and Repeat Cycles
P115 Z Rough Stock of Rough and Repeat Cycles
P116 Cut Increment
P117 Roughing Type (Pattern or 45 degree retract)
P118 Relief
P119 First Depth
P121 Cut Length
P122 Cut Depth
P123 End Point
P124 Diameter
P125 Turning Taper
P126 Facing Taper
P130 Minimum Thread Cut Amount
P131 Threading Finish Passes
P136 Probe Radius
P139 X R-Plane
P140 Z R-Plane

P141 Final Depth

P142 Initial Level
P143 Cut Increment
P144 First Depth
P145 Plunge Feedrate
P146 Peckup Increment
P147 Peck Clearance
P148 Dwell 1
P149 Dwell 2
P156 Material Length
P157 Material Diameter
P172 Z Mirror Position
P173 X Mirror Position
P180 Z Scale Position
P181 X Scale Position
P188 Z Scale Factor
P189 Z Scale Factor

197
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

P196 Z Rotate Position

P197 X Rotate Position
P198 Angle of Rotation
P199 Incremental or absolute dimensions on G76 . . G79

F10 (User) Main-Parms-User

This set of 100 parameters is reserved for the parts programmer to use when writing parametric
programs. These parameters are undefined and can be edited, displayed or loaded from this
screen. The editing and displaying formats are identical to the other parameters discussed in this
section.

F8 (Prog) Main-Prog
There are two modes of program file creation/editing available on the control: text and
conversational.

Pressing the F8 (Prog) key will enable the soft keypad to allow selection of the type of
programming desired. It also allows the transfer of programs to or from the floppy disk drive.

Text and conversational programs are stored in the control in different file formats and have
different prefixes to distinguish them. Text programs are prefixed with the letter "O" and are kept
in the parts directory in ASCII format. Conversational programs are kept in the parts directory in
two formats: ASCII, prefixed with an "O"; and conversational, prefixed with a "P".

Only programs prefixed with an "O" may be run or verified.

198
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text
Upon entering the text programming mode, the upper right-hand box containing the active
program number will display the last text program edited.

F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit
The F1 (Edit) key will select the program shown in the upper right corner as the active text edit
program.

Text Editing Terms

Editor: A program that allows entry and modification of information, then stores it in a
file for later retrieval and/or further modification

Text: Refers to a sequence of characters and/or lines being edited. The individual characters are
manipulated using the widely accepted American Standard Code for Information
Interchange (ASCII).

Cursor: A small box on the screen that marks where changes are being made to the text.

Entering and Editing Text

You enter text in much the same way as you enter text on a typewriter, and most of the keys on
the keypads respond in the same fashion (pressing Enter terminates a block, for example).
However, there are many important differences to note.

The cursor always indicates where the new text will be entered, and you can move the
cursor in a number of ways. You may copy and move text with block commands. You may
locate a particular string of text with the F8 (Find) command and optionally replace it with

199
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

another string using the F7 (Chang) command. And, in most cases, you can even undo your last
few changes with the F2 (Rest) restore line or F1 (UnDo) commands. These commands, and
many more, are described briefly in the following sections.

The first screen you will see when entering the text editor is the edit screen with the first 16 lines
of the program displayed. The main edit soft keys are located at the bottom of the screen.

Text may now be entered at the current cursor position.

Key Definitions

F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block
A block is any arbitrarily defined, contiguous unit of text. A block can be as small as a single
character or as large as an entire program. Mark a block by placing a begin-block marker at the
first character in the desired block and an end-block marker just beyond the last character. Once
marked, the block can be copied, moved, or deleted.

Although marked blocks are normally highlighted so you can see what you've marked, the block
may be hidden (or made visible) with the F5 (Hide) hide block command.

F1 (Begin) Marks the beginning of a block. The marker itself is not visible on the
screen, and the block becomes visible only when the end-block marker is
set.

200
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (End) Marks the end of a block. Like the begin-block marker, the end-block
marker is invisible, and the block itself will not be displayed unless both
markers are set.

F3 (Word) Marks a single word as a block, combining the functions of the begin-
block and end-block commands. If the cursor is positioned within a word,
that word will be marked. If it is not within a word, then the word to the
right of the cursor will be marked. And if there is no word to the right of
the cursor, then the word to the left will be marked.

F5 (Hide) Toggles off and on the visual marking of a block.

F6 (Del) Deletes a marked and displayed block. Although F1(UnDo) can usually
restore portions of an accidentally deleted block, there is no command to
restore a deleted block in its entirety, so use this command with care.

F7 (Copy) Creates a copy of a marked and displayed block at the current cursor
position. The original block is left unchanged, and the markers are placed
around the new copy of the block.

F8 (Move) Moves a marked and displayed block from its current position to the
cursor's position. The markers remain around the block at its new position.

F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr
The F2 (Cursr) menu contains extended cursor movement commands:

F1 (BBlok) Moves the cursor to the position of the block-begin marker.

F2 (EBlok) Moves the cursor to the position of the block-end marker.

F3 (Tab) Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

F5 (TOF) Moves the cursor to the first character of the program.

F6 (EOF) Moves the cursor to the last line of the program.

F7 (PgUp) Moves cursor up 15 lines.

F8 (PgDn) Moves cursor down 15 lines.

F9 (Left) Moves cursor to beginning of line.

F10 (Right) Moves cursor to end of line.

201
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words
The F3 (Words) soft key represents reserved words that may be used for programming the
control.

Pressing a key will cause that word to be printed on the screen. See Section 6 on parametric
programming.

Note: F6 (RETRN) will print RETURN.

F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc
This section discusses a number of commands that do not readily fit into any of the other
category.

F1 (UnDo) Restores whole lines deleted with the delete line command or the delete
block command. It does not restore single characters or words.

F2 (Rest) Will undo any changes made to a line of text as long as you have not left
the line. The line is restored to its previous contents regardless of the
changes made.

F3 (HDW) Allows the use of the handwheel to move to a position. You may insert the
axis position in the program by pressing the Enter key.

F1 (X) - F2 (Z) Choice of axis position to insert

F6 (LnDel) Deletes the line containing the cursor and moves any lines below it up one
line. The cursor moves to column 1 of the next line.

F7 (Chang) This operation works the same as the Find command except that you can
replace the found string with any other string of up to 67 characters. After
entering the search string, you are asked to enter the replacement string.
The last replacement string entered, if any, will be displayed; you may
accept it, edit it, or enter a new string. Finally, you are prompted for
options. The options you used last are displayed first. You may enter new
options (canceling the old ones), edit the current options, or select them by
pressing Enter. The options available are the same as those for the Find
command.

202
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F8 (Find) Lets you search for a string of up to 67 characters. When you enter this
command you will be asked for a search string. The last search string
entered, if any, will be displayed. You can select the string again by
pressing Enter, or you may edit it or enter a new search string. After the
search string is entered you must specify your search options. The options
you used last, if any, are displayed. You can enter new options (canceling
the old ones), edit the current options, or select them again by pressing
Enter. The following options are available.

B Searches backwards from the current cursor position toward the

beginning of the program.

G Searches globally. The entire program is scanned for the search

string regardless of the current position of the cursor. The search
starts at the beginning of the program if searching forwards and at
the end if searching backwards.

L Limits searches to the currently marked block.

U Ignores case; treats all alphabetic characters as if they were

uppercase.

W Searches for whole words only; skips matching patterns embedded

in other words.

If the text contains a target matching the search string, the cursor is
positioned just beyond it.

Note: An additional option is available for the change operation.

N: Without the "N" option, before changing each string, a prompt

"Replace Y/N/A/Q" will allow the operator to

Y: Yes - change it

N: No - don't change it

A: REPLACE ALL without prompting

(used with "G" global option)

Q: QUIT - stop (used with "G" global option)

ESC: does the same thing as quit

203
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

With the "N" option, no prompt is displayed before it changes the

string or strings.

F9 (FNext) Repeats the last search operation. If the last search command called for a
Find Operation, the same search string and options will be repeated; for a
Find-and-Replace Operation, the replacement string will be reused as well.

F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins
If the F5 (Ins) key is on, the editor is in insert mode and characters will be inserted at the cursor
position. If the F5 (Ins) key is off, the editor is in overwrite mode and characters will overwrite
any previous character at the cursor position.

F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del
Deletes the character under the cursor and moves any characters to the right of the cursor one
position to the left. This command does not work across line breaks.

Note: At any time while in the editor, pressing the ← (backspace) key on the numeric keypad
will move the cursor one character to the left and delete the character positioned there.
Any characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the left.

F7 ( ↑ ) Moves cursor up one line.

F8 ( ↓ ) Moves the cursor down one line.

F9 ( ← ) Moves the cursor to the left.

F10 ( → ) Moves the cursor to the right.

ESC (Exit) Upon pressing the ESC (Exit) key to leave the editor, the active
edit program is checked to determine if it was modified. If it was, a
prompt will be displayed in the message window asking if the
changes should be accepted and stored. Pressing "Y" will accept
the changes and alter the program file. Pressing "N" will abort the
changes and leave the file unchanged. ESC will return to the
editor.

HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf

When editing a text file, you can verify the program you are editing.

The HELP (Verf) key will not be active if you are currently running or verifying a program.
When you press the HELP (Verf) key, the program will dry run verify with a zero radius tool,
just as if you had verified the program using the F5 (Part) option. Feed moves are shown as
yellow. Rapid moves are not shown. After the program is verified, it will be auto-scaled. You
will be looking at the F6 (Displ)-F3 (Graph) screen. You can then rotate, scale, zoom, etc. If you
press ESC you will return to the text editor.

204
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Notes: When the program is being verified, it will ignore M6s, M0s, M1s, INPUT
statements, etc. The program is copied to a file in the parts directory called
“TEXTVER”. No checks are done for out-of-parts space when the file is copied.
The “TEXTVER” file is deleted when you return to the edit screen. This is done so
that it will not automatically save the program you are working on (it will still
prompt you with the “Program was Modified. Accept changes? (Y/N)” message.

The HELP(Verf) key will not show up if you are in the next level down such as
F1(Block), F2(Cursr), F3(Words), or F4(Misc).

If the program takes a long time to verify, you can press the ESC key while it is
verifying. It will auto-scale what it has verified and put you at the F6(Displ)-
F3(Graph) screen. The program will continue to verify until it ends or until you
press ESC again.

F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New
The F2 (New) key will allow entry of a number for a new text program. After the number has
been entered, the control will check the text programs to see if a text program by that number
already exists. If one is found, a warning will be displayed and the operator will be allowed to
okay the erasing of the text program prior to entering the text editor.

F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old
The F3 (Old) key will allow entry of the number of an existing text program. After the number
has been entered, the control will check the text programs currently in the parts directory to see if
a program by that number already exists. If one is found, the edit window will appear displaying
the first 16 lines of the program. If one is not found, an error stating such will appear and, after
pressing the ESC key, another number may be entered.

F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any
Pressing the F4 (Any) key will prompt the user to enter the file to be edited. Specify the drive,
path, file name, and extension.

205
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu
The F7 (Menu) key will display a list of all text programs currently in the parts directory. By
using the F7 - F10 keys, file selection arrows are positioned at the program to edit, and the F5
(Enter) key is pressed to make a selection. See Section Two for information on changing drives
and paths to other text programs.

The edit window will appear displaying the first 16 programs. To select one of the programs
listed in the window, use the arrow and page keys to move the cursor to the desired program and
press F5 (Enter) – or Enter – on the keyboard. The Menu function can be called from other
screens but works the same way from all. When called from the Verify screen, the selected
program becomes the active program being edited. F1 (Verf) will graphically verify the part the
cursor is on. The graph shown will be for a 0 diameter tool. F6 (Togle) will display the file size,
last time and date it was edited, and seven characters for the file name. Subdirectories are
specified by <DIR> as the file name. The ".." specifies the parent to the current directory. If you
press the HELP (Drive) key, a list of the available drives is displayed.

Note: The file name consists of the characters included in parentheses. If there are no
parentheses on the first block, the name is the first block.

Pressing the “D” key toggles the menu to and from full DOS names. Pressing the “N” key
toggles sorting by file name or file description.

Regardless of which selection mode (Edit, New, Old, Any, or Menu) is used, whenever the edit
window is displayed, the number of the text program being edited will be shown in the active
window.

206
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv
The following discussion will deal with selecting conversational programs. Upon entering the
conversational programming mode, the active window in the upper right-hand corner will change
to show the last conversational program edited.

Five options are available from which to choose the conversational program that is to be edited.

F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit
Pressing the F1 (Edit) key will select the active conversational program and enter the
conversational programming system.

207
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

While programming or editing in the conversational system, three types of soft key
configurations will be encountered. They are:

- Soft key configuration 1: Edit Keys

These function keys are available whenever the edit menu system has not been entered. It is
possible to step through the program, edit events, and insert or delete events.

Definitions of the Edit Keys

F1 (Edit): Pressing the F1 (Edit) key will position the cursor at the first field of the current
event. The store/input keys will appear and the event may be edited.

208
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (View): Allows viewing of the entire program and lets the operator position to any of the
events in the program. A window similar to the following will be displayed.

F7 ( ↑ ), F8 ( ↓ ), F9 (PgUp), and F10 (PgDn) can be used to move to the desired event. Then
press ESC or Enter to display that event.

F1 (Begin): Marks the block beginning

F2 (End): Marks the block end

F3: Deletes the block of events

F4 Copies the block of events to the cursor position

F5 Moves the block of events to the cursor position

Note: You cannot move, delete, or copy the program setup screen or the end of program events.

F3 (Event) Allows entry of an event number for which to search. If the event number is not
found, the end-of-program screen will be displayed.

F4 (T##) Allows entry to search for a tool number. If tool number is not found the event
displayed will not change.

F6 (Ins) INS is used to insert events in a program. The new event(s) will be inserted before
the event that is currently displayed. Inserting will continue until the F10 (Exit)
soft key is pressed.

209
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Del) Will delete the event currently being displayed.

F9 (Prev) Displays the previous event in the program file.

F10 (Next) Displays the next event in the program file.

Help (Verf) When editing a conversational file, you can verify the program you are editing.
The Help key will show Verf when it is active.

The HELP (Verf) key will not be active if you are currently running or verifying a program.
When you press the HELP (Verf) key, the program will dry run verify with a zero radius tools,
just as if you had verified the program using the F5 (Part) option. Feed moves are shown as
yellow. Rapid moves are not shown. After the program is verified it will be auto-scaled. You will
be looking at the F6 (Displ) - F3 (Graph) screen. You can rotate, scale, zoom, etc. If you press
ESC, you will return to the conversational editor.

Notes on HELP (Verf)

Note 1: When the program is being verified, it will ignore M6s, M0s, M1s, INPUT statements,
etc.

Note 2. If the program takes a long time to verify, you can press the ESC key while it is verifying.
It will auto-scale what it has verified and put you at the F6(Displ)-F3(Graph) screen. It
will then continue to verify until it ends or you press ESC again.

Note 3. Whiles without wends and wends without whiles will not give error messages.

ESC (Exit) Exits the conversational system and automatically creates the executable text
program with an O prefix.

210
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

- Soft key configuration 2: Store/Input Keys

These soft keys will be available whenever input is expected. At this time, a screen containing
any number of fields will be displayed and the cursor will be positioned in one of the fields.

There are two types of fields, which may be displayed on an input screen: data and toggle. Data
fields are fields in which data is entered using the keypad. Fields that are red require entries.
Toggle fields are fields that have a limited number of possible input values and whose value may
only be changed by pressing the F3 (Togl) key.

Definitions of the Store/Input Keys

F1 (Store) Accepts the entries and adds to the program file. If all required data has not been
entered, the F1 (Store) key will not work and the cursor will position to the field
requiring input. Each screen stored is called an event.

F3 (Togl) Pressing this key will result in the next toggle value being displayed in the field. It
will not be present in a data field.

F5 (Del) Used to delete an entry from a data field. It will not be present in a toggle field.

F7 ( ↑ ) Moves cursor to the previous field.

F8 ( ↓ ) Moves cursor to the next field.

F9 ( ← ) Moves cursor to the left. Has no effect in a toggle field.

F10 ( → ) Moves cursor to the right. Has no effect in a toggle field.

211
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

ESC (Exit) Will abort input and return to the menu keys.

F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New
Pressing the F2 (New) key will allow entry of the number for a new conversational program.
After the number has been entered, the control will check the conversational programs currently
in the parts directory to see if a program by that number already exists. If it does, two warnings
will be displayed and the operator will be allowed to okay the erasing of the conversational
program and its associated text program prior to entering the conversational system. Remember,
conversational programs are stored in both formats.

F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old
The F3 (Old) key will allow entry of the number of an existing conversational program. After the
number has been entered, the control will check the conversational programs currently in the
parts directory to see if a program by that number exists. If it does, the edit window will appear
displaying the program setup screen. If not, an error stating that the program was not found will
appear and, after pressing the ESC (Exit) key, another number may be entered.

F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any
The F4 (Any) key will allow entry of any file. Specify the drive, path, file name, and extension.
If the name is of the correct format for a conversational program, you will enter the conversation
program mode. If not, you will enter the text programming mode.

Main-Prog-Conv
The menu keys are used to move throughout the conversational system and reach the desired
input screen. The menu key sequence is listed on the Conversational System Flowchart in
Section 6.

- Soft key configuration 3: Programming Keys

Keys displayed in the first level menu:

212
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Pressing a function key will either bring up an input screen [e.g. F1 (Pos)] much like the
following.

or another menu [e.g. F2 (Turn)] like this:

Notice that on all levels except level 1 there is an ESC (Back) key. This key will return you to
the previous level menu keys.

Pressing the F10 (Exit) key will exit the menu subsystem and display the level 1 Edit keys.

When an input screen is encountered the following Store/Input keys appear.

Note: F3 (Togl) and F5 (Del) cannot be on the same screen.

See SECTION SIX - CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS for more detailed information on
the conversational input screens.

213
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu
The F7 (Menu) key will display a list of all conversational programs currently loaded in the parts
directory.

By using F7 - F10 keys, file selection arrows are positioned at the program to edit, and the F5
(Enter) key is pressed to make the selection. The edit window will appear displaying the program
setup screen.

Regardless of which selection mode [F1 (Edit), F2 (New), F3 (Old), F4 (Any), or F7 (Menu)] is
used, whenever the edit window is displayed the number of the conversation program being
worked with will display in the editing window.

F6 (Togle) displays the time and date for each program.

F9 (Verf) Main-Verf
The F9 (Verf) function is used to verify part programs. Most verification is done in the graphics
mode, but it doesn't have to be. The times are valid during verify and can be used to estimate
machining times. The program that is verified is the active program. To get coordinate infor-
mation to compare against a print, put the control in block mode and step through the program.
The cursor in the graphic mode will step around the part, and the X Z display will read out the
coordinate values of each point.

214
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Verify is used to verify the active program. Upon pressing the F9 (Verf) key, the following
screen appears.

After the above screen appears, push F1 (Start) and the following screen will appear.

215
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The F1 (First) key is automatically selected when entering this screen from the Verf screen.
Therefore, if it is desired to verify the active program from the beginning, you need only to press
the Cycle Start button. If F2 (Block) is pressed, the control will request that the desired block or
sequence number be typed in followed by enter. If Cycle Start is pressed, the active program
will start verifying from the selected block number. If F3 (Tool) is pressed, the control will
request a tool number. After typing the tool number followed by depressing Enter, the
Cycle Start button is pressed. The active program will start verifying at the desired tool number
and the following screen will appear. The F4 (Path) key will show the tool path on the graphics
screen, which is the default. The F5 (Part) key will show the part path on the graphics screen.
The F6 (Both) key will show both the part path and then the tool path on the graphics screen.

Note: If the block # or tool # typed in is not located within the program, the program will start
from the beginning.

The screen above is the basic verify screen with two new additions: a block number display and
F9 (Halt). The block number shows the current line being executed as the program verifies. The
F9 (Halt) key is similar to Feedhold in that when pushed the machine will stop. However, unlike
Feedhold, F9 (Halt) also allows a new program to be started.

F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block
When the F3 (Block) switch is activated, the program will stop at the end of each block. Each
time the Cycle Start button is pushed one more block will be verified.

F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop
When the optional stop key F4 (OStop) is activated, the program will stop at each M01
command.

216
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip
When the block skip switch F5 (BSkip) is activated, the program will skip all blocks started with
a / (slash).

/F5 When the block skip switch is active the Feedrate change command will
not be executed.

F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ
The F6 (Display) key can be accessed from a number of screens. The following screen is shown
as if the F6 (Displ) was entered from the F9 (Verf) screen. All the display functions and screens
are identical, independent of the entry point. Only the return point differs based on the original
entry point. When the F6 (Disp) key is pressed, the following screen will appear.

F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist
See page 146, Section Five.

F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error
See page 147, Section Five.

217
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph
If the F3 (Graph) key is activated, the control switches from displaying text to a graphic display
of the active part program. The following screen will appear.

The graphics on this control are full 3D and will be displayed in the graphics area as long as the
control remains in the F3 (Graph) mode. When other displays are requested, windows will
appear in the graphics area showing the requested data. When these functions are concluded, the
windows will disappear and the graphic display will be reinstated. The scale at the top of the
screen is to be used as a reference for the part size. As the screen scale is changed, the
graduations on the ruler will change accordingly. The ruler graduations are in machine units, but
on an English system. The largest graduations equal approximately one inch.

Note: The graphics are cleared from the display at the beginning of running or verifying a
program.

The graphics functions used in the verify mode are the same functions used in the run mode. For
a full explanation of these functions, see page 147, Section Five on runtime graphics.

F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag
See page 150, Section Five.

218
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry
F8 (Dry) run in the verify mode will run the program as fast as possible. For feedrate override
positions 100% and greater – verify speeds are progressively slower for overrides 0-90%.

F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt
F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum
Once a program has been F9 (Halt)ed, the resume feature of the control becomes active. The F9
(Resum) key will now be displayed on the verify screen. A program can be resumed as long as
the resume is active. If the resume function is selected, the active program will be resumed at the
halted point.

The F3, F4, F5, and F8 keys on the verify screen set the mode of operation in which a program
will verify. When these keys are in a highlighted state the functions will be active in any
currently verifying program or program to be verified.

Note: You can switch to run from verifying. This is convenient for long DNC programs
as it picks up on all feeds/speeds/tool offsets/cutter comp/etc. To switch to run
from verifying, you must be in block mode waiting for cycle start. Press the F9
(Halt). The F10 key will no show F10 (Run). When the F10 (Run) is pressed, the
control will be as if a halt resume was done while running a program. Be sure to
take the control out of block and/or dry run if you are in it. Do not try this in the
middle of automatic tool changes or other I/O related routines.

F10 (Util) Main-Util

Keys and options displayed when F10 (Util) is pressed:

F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files
The file utilities contain basic program manipulation functions. They are:

219
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load
The F1 (Load) function is used to load programs from the floppy disk into the control's program
memory. When this function is selected the following screen is displayed.

The edit window will display a list of the programs on the floppy drive. The selection cursor
( > < ) is positioned at the first program.

F1 (Start) Pressing this key will begin the transfer of the selected programs from floppy disk
to program memory. The operator will be prompted if the file already exists.

F2 (Set) Selects the file at the cursor position to be loaded from floppy disk. It will be
highlighted.

F3 (Reset) Unselects the file at the cursor position. Unhighlights, highlighted files.

F4 (All) Selects all programs on floppy disk to be loaded. Highlights all files.

F5 (None) Unselects all selected programs. Unhighlights all highlighted files.

F6 (Togle) Shows size and date of the file.

F7 ( ↑ ) Moves selection cursor up one line.

F8 ( ↓ ) Moves selection cursor down one line.

F9 (PgUp) Moves selection cursor up 16 lines.

F10 (PgDn) Moves selection cursor down 16 lines.

220
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The help key will be used to either select a new drive or to verify a program (based on the
control parameter)

Help (Drive) Displays a list of available drives for a new menu.

Help (Verf) Will graphically verify the part that the cursor is on.

Note: If the parameter to extract files is set, a single file on the floppy separated by 0#### can
be loaded and separated into several files. When extracting files being loaded, the
program does not check for files that already exist.

F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save
The F2 (Save) function is used to save programs from the control's program memory to the
floppy disk.

The F2 (Save) function operates the same as the F1 (Load) function with the exception that the
transfer direction is changed.

F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename
The F3 (Rename) function changes the name of a program. The operator will be prompted if the
new filename already exits.

F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy
The F4 (Copy) function makes a copy of a program under another name. The operator will be
prompted if the new file already exists.

F5 (8Ram) Main-Util-Files-4Ram
This function is used to load programs from a floppy disk, zip drive or network to the RAM
drive and later DNC'ed from the RAM drive.

Note: Bigger RAM drives are available as an option.

F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase
The F9 (Erase) function is used to erase programs from the control's program memory. The keys
available are the same as those in the F2 (Save) option.

F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232
The F4 (RS232) utilities contain basic communications functions. They are:

F1 (COM1 or COM 2)
F1(COM1 or COM2) is the primary port.

221
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send
When F5 (Send) is depressed, the following keys appear.

After selecting F1 (Text) or F2 (Conv), select which programs you want to send to the off-line
computer from the menu. These actions will display the following menu.

F1 (Begin) starts transmission of the active send program that is shown in the upper right-hand
corner.

F7 (Menu) allows selection of programs from a menu to send.

Notes on Send

Note 1: If sending parameters, F7(Menu) is not an option.

Note 2:The RS-232 parameters must be set to the same values on both the control and the
computer. Always check these parameter settings.

Note 3: The RS-232 parameters are found in the control parameters (Main-Parms-Ctrl). Normal
parameter settings are:

Primary Port COM1

Baud rate 1200 through 9600
Parity Even
Data bits 7
Stop bits 2

F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev
The F6 (Recev) option is used to receive programs or parameters from an off-line computer into
the control program memory. Upon pressing the F6 (Recev) key, a new set of selection keys will
appear as shown below. Then a new program number must be entered in the message window.
Once a valid program number has been entered, the edit screen will appear and display the
program as it is received. Receiving will continue until the ESC (Done) key is pressed.

222
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Note: If the program number being received already exists, the operator will be prompted.

If the parameter to extract files is set, several files can be sent from an off-line computer; the
control will extract them to the correct #### file if they are separated by 0####'s. When
extracting, no checking is done for files that already exist.

F7 (8Ram) Main-Util-RS232-8Ram
This function is used to load programs from RS-232 to the ram drive and later DNC'ed from the
ram drive.

Note: Bigger ram drives are available as an option.

F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC
The F6 (DNC) mode is used for running large programs. These programs are not loaded into the
control's memory, therefore they cannot have GO-TO's, WHILE-WEND loops, GO-SUB's, or
CALLS.

Note: CALLS are allowed in fast DNC fast.

GO-TO’s are allowed in run DNC and Verf DNC if the “resolve DNC” parameter is set
to Yes.

When F6 (DNC) is pressed, the following DNC modes appear.

223
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast
After pressing F3 (Fast), the following screen will appear.

F1 (RS232)
Depressing F1 (RS232) will wait for data from the Com port, then request a cycle start to begin
the program.

F2 (File)
F2 (File) selects a program from a menu of the programs in the control.

F3 (Disk)
F3 (Disk) selects a program from a menu of the programs on the floppy disk or from local area
network.

F4 (Any)
F4 (Any) allows you to type in the name of any drive, path, file, and extension.

F5 (Old)
F5 (Old) allows you to type in the number of the file you want to run.

F6 (Ram4)
F6 (Ram4) is used if a program has been loaded to the RAM drive (via RS-232 or floppy disk).
F6 (Ram4) will select that program.

After selecting the INPUT mode, the control will request a cycle start to begin the program. All
of the above input modes – except RS-232 – will allow the program to start at locations other
than the beginning. The other options are as follows.

224
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F1 (First)
F1 (First) starts from the beginning.

F2 (Block)
F2 (Block) starts from a sequence number.

F3 (Tool)
F3 (Tool) starts from a tool number.

F4 (Cont)
F4 (Cont) allows starting from a location where DNC was aborted earlier. When a file is aborted
the file position is saved. No checking is performed if the operator has switched file numbers or
modified the DNC file. F4 (Cont) will continue from the file position that was aborted on any
file.

F9 (Skip)
F9 (Skip) will ask for a skip count. If the skip count is non-zero, a cycle start will be requested
for skipping (or ignoring) that number of blocks, and then a second cycle start will run from the
next block.

F10 (Mirr)
F10 (Mirr) allows mirroring around X0 and Y0 in DNC-FAST.

F3 (Fast)
When F3 (Fast) is running, the following display appears.

When the program ends or ESC (Abort) is pressed, the display will show the total DNC time,
total distance, average feedrate, average block time, and average blocks/seconds.

225
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

This mode should be used for large programs where a fast block rate is required, for example
when making short moves at fast feedrates. No trig help, cutter comp, rotating, scaling, or other
non-standard commands, can be done in this mode. Valid data for the fast mode are:

X, Z, I, K, F and N

Valid G codes are:

G0, G1, G2, G3

Valid format for arcs is:

(G2/G3), (I/K), (X,Z)

If a code that is not in these groups is executed, the block time for that block will slow down and
it will be highlighted in the block display.

F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run
F4 (Run) allows the same selections as F3 (Fast) for input modes. F4 (Run) does not have the
F10 mirror option. After the input mode has been selected and any blocks have been skipped, the
control selects the run screen (Main-Run) and the DNC program can be run similar to any other
program.

F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf
F9 (Verf) works identically as F4 (Run) mode. After the input mode has been selected and
blocks have been skipped, the control moves to the verify screen (Main-Verf) and the DNC
program can be verified similar to any other program.

Note: For F4 (Run) and F9 (Verf) RS-232 DNC mode, a search for a tool number or block
number can be done to start a program from a desired location. The program cannot be
reset to “first” after a search for a tool or block number..

The option for part/path/both is not available in DNC verify.

226
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Chart) Main-Util-Chart
The F7 (Chart) key will display help charts created by the end user specific to their applications.
If there is a file called charts.dat in the RAM directory, it will be displayed. The format of this
file allows an indexing system to other files and data available to the operator.

The following is a sample listing of charts.dat.

Note: Only the first 16 lines of chart.dat are displayed. The first 12 characters of each line are
not displayed.

Speeds and Feeds

(updated on 10-May-94)
See Bill Jones for more information
or to make changes to these charts.

Carstl.dat * Carbon Steel

AllSt.dat * Alloy Steel
·
etc.
·
·
Allum.dat * Aluminum
CstIron.dat * Cast Iron
Acme.dat * Jobs for ACME Inc.

F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info
F8 (Info) shows information about the software, hardware, etc. The following function keys will
be displayed.

F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std
F1 (Std) shows standard information as representative in the following window.

227
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Memory Avail displays the system memory available in bytes.

Parts Storage displays the amount of parts storage in bytes.

Front Panel displays the front panel version code.

Controller Card displays the controller card version (v0206 is 2.06) and an error count (should be
zero).

Acroloop information for X and Z axis for Centurion 5 (only) systems is as follows.

version, (v0214=2.14)
error count is noted (should be zero)
four bytes giving optional acroloop programs loaded (the .HEX files) formatted as:

aamm ssrr, where:

aa=axis (01=X, 02=Y, etc)
mm=major version (00=manual, 01=P1ATC plunger, 07=P7ATC, 08=P8ATC,
11=P1 geneva)
ss=sub version; uniquely identifies .HEX file.
rr=reserved (always zero)

NCB information for X and Z axis for 7000 Series and Centurion 6/7 systems is as follows.

version number
date of each NCB.HEX file
a brief description of the file

228
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys
F2 (Sys) shows system information as representative in the following window.

This screen gives internal information about the system. Lines 1 through 5 show memory
allocations to DOS, CNC overlays, and the heaps. Line 6 shows the MS-DOS version and
whether the CPU is an 80286, 80386, 80486, or 80586. Lines 11 & 12 show the compiler and
blocks pre-allocated for canned cycles, text cycles, and custom M and G codes. Line 13 is a hex
dump of the BIOS ROM area at F000:0. Line 14 is a hex dump of the Disk Emulator ROM at
CA00:0. Line 15 gives a guess at the Bios type and Disk Emulator type.

F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp
F3 (Fp) shows front panel information as illustrated in the figure below.

The first line gives the front panel version. The next two lines show several abbreviations and
numbers:

AK Acks received from keyboard encoder/controller

RT ReTrans received from keyboard encoder/controller
TO Timeouts on transmissions to keyboard encoder, detected by keyboard
controller
SR Slice resends - timeouts detected by CNC
SS Slice sends - standard sends to keyboard encoder
NK Nacks detected by keyboard controller
DC Spindle DAC value send to keyboard encoder

229
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

PE Parity Errors detected by keyboard controller

TL Time Limits detected by keyboard controller
CL Control pressed received by keyboard controller
(used to indicate data/command mismatch)

F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path
F4 (Path) displays the following screen, which shows the path file. In the standard order, these
are the directories for ROM, RAM, Parts, Display, and Floppy. Below the Parts directory is
shown the available parts space in bytes. For the ROM, Parts, and Display directories, the DOS
volume ID for that drive is shown to the right.

Note: The path file is reloaded when the above information is displayed. Therefore, one can
edit the path file then reload it by using this command.

If the paths for parts and/or remote files have been changed from the menus,
they will be stored back to the original paths from PATH.DAT.

Version greater than #.#169 have a “Floppy” path and a “Remote Files” path. The
“Floppy” path is used specifically for saving and loading parameters.

230
 SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time
F5 (Time) displays the times and distances calculated when verifying a program. Timing
information is for 100% on the feedrate override for tool changes, spindle up to speed, block
stops, etc. Times are in hrs, min., sec. Distance is in inches or mm. Tool changes add 10 seconds
to the feed time.

This above screen shows timing information for the last program verified. The times displayed
assume the feedrate override is 100%. RUN gives the total time, FEED the milling time (G1, G2,
G3), and RAPID the G0 time. All times are in Hours:Minutes:Seconds. Distance is the total
distance moved in inches or millimeters.

F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram
F6 (Ram) displays the following screen, which shows the contents of the RAM directory. F6 is
used mainly for diagnostic purposes. Programs that run special options on a machine are usually
stored in this directory.

231
SECTION FIVE - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag
F7 (Diag) displays the following screen, which shows the diagnostics of the machine just prior to
the machine e-stopping. F7 is used mainly for diagnostic purposes to determine the source of the
e-stop. The user is capable of viewing the states of the inputs and outputs for each axis.

F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank
F9 (Blank) will blank the screen. Using this function will reduce images being burned into the
front panel display. The screen will remain blanked until any key is pushed.

The screen will blank automatically and remain blank until any key is pressed. Block stops, tool
changes, requests for cycle start, etc. will unblank the screen, prompt the operator, and then
reblank the screen. There is also a timer to blank the screen if keys are not pressed in a set
amount of time. See page 177, Section Five concerning screen blank time parameter.

F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command

If the Misc parameter “Command Name” is not blank, the 1st 5 characters will be displayed in
the F10 key. When the F10 key is pressed, the command will be executed. If several commands
are needed a batch file can be executed. See page 179 for more information on this feature.

Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV

Pressing and holding the auger reverse key will cause the auger to run in reverse. This is used to
help un-jam the chip removal system. The auger will run in reverse until the key is released.

The auger will not run (forward or reverse) if the door is open or if the machine is e-stopped.

232
 SECTION SIX - CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Each conversational program has a text program associated with it. The conversational program
file starts with letter P followed by four digits such as P1234. The text file starts with the letter O
followed by four digits such as O1234. The text program is created, or posted, from the
conversational program. Changes in the conversational program create a new text program from
the modified conversational program. The operator can view or change the text program, but his
modifications will not be transferred to the conversational program. Reposting the conversational
program will overwrite his modified text program.

This section contains diagrams of the conversational input screens and an explanation of each
screen.

233
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Not all possible combinations of screen inputs are shown; therefore, if additional information
concerning any particular screen or field is required, the appropriate section of the manual should
be referenced.

Fields that are red are required entries. These fields will appear black after the data is entered.

Note: X dimensions followed by a “d” denote a diameter dimension. X dimensions followed by

an “r” denote a radius dimension.

The program setup screen shown below will always appear at the beginning of every program. It
initializes certain important functions so no settings remain from a previously run program.

Program setup
The conversational screen for program set-up appears as follows. It is the first event of every
conversational program.

The main setup keys for conversational programming appear as follows.

234
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos
The position screen will normally be used to do rapid positioning; however, feed moves may be
made by toggling the feedrate field and entering a feedrate.

The conversational screen for Cartesian rapid positioning appears as follows.

Note: See page 11, Section 2 for further information on positioning.

The conversational screen for polar feed position appears as follows.

Note: See page 13, Section 2 for further information on polar definition of a line.

F2 (Turn) Main-Prog-Conv-Turn
The F2 (Turn) selection brings up the following soft keys:

235
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F1 (Ruff) Main-Prog-Turn-Ruff
The Rough Turning Set-Up is used to define how to remove the material defined in the geometry
between this screen and the end of the roughing cycle.

(U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the X axis.

(W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis.

(I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough finish allowance in the X axis.

(K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough-finish allowance in the Z axis.

(V) 1st X Depth: The X depth of the 1st cut in the roughing cycle. If this is not
entered the 1st cut is at (X start point) + (X finish stock/2) + (X
rough stock) - (cut increment).

(D) Cut Increment: Depth of cuts. Designated without sign. The cutting direction
depends on the direction of the 1st move in the pattern.

Relief The type of relief made at the end of the cutting. PATTERN will
(PATTERN or 45 DEGS): cut along the pattern of the part, 45 DEGS. will retract at a 45
degree angle before retracting Z for the next cut. If the relief type
is 45 DEGS. no pockets are allowed in the pattern.

(R) Clearance: Distance of the 45 degree relief or an additional distance to pull

away after the pattern relief.

Compensation OFF, Tool nose radius compensation.

LEFT, or RIGHT:

(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the roughing cycle. X and Z return to the start
point at the end of the cycle.

(N) Pattern Number: Any number between 0 and 99. The pattern can be called by a
finishing cycle later in the program.

236
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Rough cutting is done by first cutting parallel to the Z axis down to the pattern leaving the rough
stock. After cutting parallel to the Z axis is completed, a pass is made along the finish pattern
leaving the finish stock.

Feed and speeds within the pattern are ignored during the parallel cuts. Feeds and speeds are
effective during the pass along the pattern. Rapid moves within the pattern are effective when
following the finish pattern.

Note: If the X rough stock and the Z rough stock are both zero, the pass made along the finish
pattern is skipped.

After rough cutting parallel to the Z axis there are 2 types of relief. 45º relief will rapid away
from the pattern at a 45º angle. Pattern relief follows the pattern and then retracts in the X axis.
A 0 (zero) clearance is allowed in the pattern relief.

237
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

No pockets are allowed when using the 45° relief.

There are four types of patterns made by the rough turning cycle. Rough cutting
for each of these four patterns is done parallel to the Z axis. The signs of X and Z
rough and finish stocks are shown for each pattern.

238
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

When there are pockets, the Z rough and finish stocks are normally 0.If Z rough and
finish stocks other than 0 are specified, it may cut beyond the finish pattern.

Note 1: Moves back to the start point from the end of the pattern are rapid moves.

Note 2: If the X end point in the pattern is not equal to the X start point of the pattern, a
shoulder to the X start point will be added.

F2 (Patrn) Main-Prog-Turn-Patrn
The Pattern Repeat Cycle repeatedly cuts a pattern incrementing the cuts down to the desired
size. This cycle is used to efficiently cut a part whose shape is already defined (forged or cast).

(U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the X axis.
(W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis.
(I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the X axis.
(K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the Z axis.
(D) Number of Passes: The number of passes to cut the rough stock.
Compensation OFF, Tool nose radius compensation.
LEFT or RIGHT:

239
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

7. (X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the roughing cycle. X and Z return to the start
point at the end of the cycle.
8. (N) Pattern Number: Any number between 0 and 99. The pattern number can be called
by a finishing cycle later in the program.

Note 1: Any feeds or speeds within the pattern are ignored.

Note 2: Rapid moves within the pattern will be executed as rapid moves during the
pattern repeat cycle.
Note 3: Moves back to the start point, from the end of the pattern, are rapid moves.

F3 (Finsh) Main-Prog-Turn-Finsh
After rough cutting with the rough turning cycle or pattern repeat cycle, the finish cycle can be
used to remove the finish stock.

(N) Pattern Number: Any pattern defined by a rough turning or pattern repeat cycle.
(F) Feedrate: The feedrate to cut the finish pattern. Any feedrates within the
pattern will be effective.

240
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

(S) Spindle Speed: The spindle speed to cut the finish pattern. Any spindle speed
within the pattern will be effective.
(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the finish cycle. X and Z return to the start point
at the end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.

Note: The only difference in the code generated between the Finish Turning and Finish Facing
Cycle is X retracts to the start point before Z after the cycle has been executed.

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

Example program using a rough turning cycle with a finish cycle for the part shown above:

Conversational Program C:\LATHE\PARTS\P0001

Event 0 of 15
Program Setup
Program name [ROLLER ]
Dimensions [Absolute]
Units [English]
Program from the [Back]
Material Length P[2.5 ]
Material Diameter P[2 ]d
Setup notes[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
---------------------------------------------------

241
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 1 of 15
Tool Change
[Tool Change]
Tool Number T[1]
Tool Description [RUFFING TOOL]
Feed per[Revolution] F[.01]
Gear Change [2]
Spindle [Constant Surface Speed]
Max Spindle Speed RPM[2000]
Constant Surface Spd S[600 ]
Spindle Restart [CW]
Coolant [On]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 2 of 15
Rough Turning Setup
X Finish Stock U[.015 ]d
Z Finish Stock W[0 ]
X Rough Stock I[.025 ]r
Z Rough Stock K[0 ]
1st X Depth V[1.975 ]d
Cut Increment D[.05 ]r
Relief [Pattern]
Clearance R[.01 ]r
Compensation [Right]
Start Point X[2.1 ]d
Z[.1 ]
Pattern Number N[1 ]
Note : Geometry between this Event
and End Cycle define the Pattern
---------------------------------------------------
Event 3 of 15
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [Rapid]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[1.54 ]d
Z-axis Z[ ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------

242
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 4 of 15
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[ ]d
Z-axis Z[0 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 5 of 15
Geometry - Arc
Feedrate F[ ]
Direction [CCW]
Center [Radius Only]
Arc Radius R[.313 ] [Short]
End Point [Absolute]
X[1.8 ]d
Z[-.489 ]
End Option [---]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 6 of 15
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[1.323 ]d
Z-axis Z[-.784 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 7 of 15
Geometry - Arc
Feedrate F[ ]
Direction [CW]
Center [Radius Only]
Arc Radius R[.344 ] [Short]
End Point [Absolute]
X[1.323 ]d
Z[-1.216 ]
End Option [---]
---------------------------------------------------

243
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 8 of 15
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[1.8 ]d
Z-axis Z[-1.511 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 9 of 15
Geometry - Arc
Feedrate F[ ]
Direction [CCW]
Center [Polar]
Arc Radius R[.313 ]
Start Angle AA[ ]
End Point [Absolute]
X[1.54 ]d
Z[-2 ]
End Option [---]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 10 of 15
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Polar]
Type [Current]
Length R[.3 ]
Angle AB[180 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 11 of 15
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[2.1 ]d
Z-axis Z[ ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 12 of 15
End Turning Pattern
---------------------------------------------------

244
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 13 of 15
Tool Change
[Tool Change]
Tool Number T[2 ]
Tool Description [ ]
Feed per[Revolution] F[.005 ]
Gear Change [---]
Spindle [Constant Surface Speed]
Max Spindle Speed RPM[200 ]
Constant Surface Spd S[900 ]
Spindle Restart [CW]
Coolant [On]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 14 of 15
Finish Turning
Pattern Number N[1 ]
Feedrate F[ ]
Spindle Speed S[ ]
Start Point X[2.1 ]d
Z[.1 ]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 15 of 15
End of Program
Spindle off [Yes]
Coolant off [Yes]
X Position (home relative)[0 ]
Z Position (home relative)[ ]
---------------------------------------------------

245
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

The above program produces the graphics shown below:

F4 (Cyc A) Main-Prog-Turn-Cyc A
Cycle A is used to make a single turning cut. The cycle rapids to the X cutting depth, makes the
cut, retracts X axis and rapids back to the start point. Tapered cuts are allowed.

Tapered Cutting Using Cycle A With Absolute Dimension

246
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

-OR-

-OR-

Compensation OFF, Tool nose radius compensation.

LEFT, or RIGHT:
Absolute or Incremental: Toggles between absolute dimensions (diameter, end point) and
incremental dimensions (depth and length).
(F) Feedrate: The feedrate to turn the part.
(S) Spindle Speed: The spindle speed to turn the part.
(X, Z) Start Point: The start point of Cycle A. X and Z return to the start point at the
end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.
(X) Diameter: The diameter to turn.
(Z) End Point: The end point of the cut.

247
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

(U) Depth: The incremental X distance and direction from the start point to the
diameter to turn.
(W) Length: The length and direction of the cut in Z from the start point.
(I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper to turn.

Straight Cutting Using Cycle A With Incremental Dimensions

248
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

When using Cycle A with incremental dimensions, the signs of the depth, length and taper
indicate the directions shown in the above figures.

F5 (Line) Main-Prog-Turn-Line
The Line Screen is used to do linear interpolation in Feed mode. Rapid moves are possible by
toggling the feedrate field. For more information on Line see the G code section on G0 or G1.

Cartesian Line

249
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Polar Line

Note 1: Chamfers are allowed for lines only. They are not allowed to or from arcs.
Note 2: For more information on lines see page 13, Section Three on G1.

F6 (Arc) Main-Prog-Turn-Arc
The Arc Screen is used to do circular interpolation in the feed mode. For more information on
arcs see the G Code section on G2/G3 in Section Three, page 15.

Incremental
Center Arc

Absolute
Center Arc

250
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Polar Arc

Note: For more information see G2/G3 in Section 3, page 15.

F7 (Tangs) Main-Prog-Turn-Tangs
The Tangs (Tangents) screen is used to compute the intersection points necessary for a tangent
arc or tangent line between two arcs. When this function is used the first arc and the tangent line
or arc will be entered into the program. The second arc information will only be used for
calculation purposes. This was done to enable a series of tangent lines or arcs to be programmed
consecutively. In most cases, a TANL and TANA command would be followed with an arc
command describing the second arc.

To determine the value of the right or left entries on these screens, draw a line connecting the
centers of the two arcs in the direction of tool movement. Then determine if the desired points
are to the right or left of this line and enter these values.

The general sequence for the above shape would be as follows:

Event 1 Line L1
Event 2 Tangent line or arc function describing arc R1 and line L2 or arc 3
Event 3 Arc R2

251
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

For more information on Tangent see Section Four, page 113.

Note: The tangent function does not post code for the second arc. In most cases the tangent
screen will be followed by the arc screen defining this second arc.

Sample program using a Tangent Arc

Conversational Program C:\LATHE\PARTS\P0003

Event 0 of 9
Program Setup
Program name [TURN ]
Dimensions [Absolute]
Units [English]
Program from the [Front]
Material Length P[7 ]
Material Diameter P[5 ]d
Setup notes[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
---------------------------------------------------

252
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 1 of 9
Tool Change
[Tool Change]
Tool Number T[1 ]
Tool Description [ ]
Feed per[Revolution] F[.03 ]
Gear Change [---]
Spindle [Constant Surface Speed]
Max Spindle Speed RPM[500 ]
Constant Surface Spd S[3000 ]
Spindle Restart [CW]
Coolant [---]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 2 of 9
Rough Turning Setup
X Finish Stock U[0 ]d
Z Finish Stock W[0 ]
X Rough Stock I[.03 ]r
Z Rough Stock K[.01 ]
1st X Depth V[4.95 ]d
Cut Increment D[.04 ]r
Relief [Pattern]
Clearance R[0 ]r
Compensation [Left]
Start Point X[5.5 ]d
Z[.5 ]
Pattern Number N[1 ]
Note : Geometry between this Event
and End Cycle define the Pattern
---------------------------------------------------
Event 3 of 9
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [Rapid]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[0 ]d
Z-axis Z[ ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------

253
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 4 of 9
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[ ]d
Z-axis Z[0 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 5 of 9
Connect two arcs with tangent line or arc.
Cut first arc in direction [CW]
R1[1 ]
XC1[0 ]d ZC1[-1 ]
Second Arc for computation is:
R2[2 ]
XC2[1 ]d ZC2[-4 ]
Exit 1st arc [Left] & enter 2nd arc [Left]
Connect with [an Arc] Center to the [Left]
Radius [2.5 ] Arc Direction [CCW]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 6 of 9
Geometry - Arc
Feedrate F[ ]
Direction [CW]
Center [Abs. Center]
Arc Radius R[2 ]
Arc Center XC[1 ]d
ZC[-4 ]
End Point [Polar]
End Angle AB[-90 ]
End Option [---]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 7 of 9
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [Cartesian]
X-axis X[5.5 ]d
Z-axis Z[ ]
End [---]
Extend Back [Off]
---------------------------------------------------
Event 8 of 9
End Turning Pattern
---------------------------------------------------

254
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 9 of 9
End of Program
Spindle off [Yes]
Coolant off [Yes]
X Position (home relative)[ ]
Z Position (home relative)[ ]
---------------------------------------------------

F8 (Cgen) Main-Prog-Turn-CGen
To use the Circle Generator (CGen) function, simply fill in any three points on an arc. These
three points will be used to compute the center and radius of the specified arc.

For more information on the circle generate function, see Section Four, page 121

Note: The Circle Generator Screen does not move to the 1st point on the arc before the arc. In
most cases the circle generator screen would be preceded by a line move to this position.

F9 (End) Main-Prog-Turn-End

The End Cycle is just a marker to denote the end of a pattern.

255
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F3 (Face) Main-Prog-Face
The F3 (Face) selection brings up the following soft keys.

F1 (Ruff) Main-Prog-Face-Ruff
The Rough Facing Cycle generates all the roughing tool paths from a specified finish pattern.
The finish pattern is specified by the geometry between the rough facing and the end cycle.

(U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the X axis.
(W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis.
(I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the X axis.
(K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the Z axis.
(V) 1st Z Depth: The Z depth of the 1st cut in the roughing cycle. If this is not
entered the 1st cut is at (Z start point) + (Z finish stock) + (Z rough
stock) - (cut increment).
(D) Cut Increment: Depth of cuts. Designated without sign. The cutting direction
depends on the direction of the 1st move in the pattern.
Relief (PATTERN or The type of relief made at the end of the cutting. PATTERN
45 DEGS.): will cut along the pattern of the part; 45 DEGS. will retract at a 45
degree angle before retracting Z for the next cut. If the relief type
is 45 DEGS. no pockets are allowed in the pattern.
(R) Clearance: Distance of the 45 degree relief or an additional distance to pull
away after the pattern relief.
Compensation OFF, LEFT, Tool nose radius compensation.
or RIGHT:

(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the roughing cycle. X and Z return to the start
point at the end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.
(N) Pattern Number: Any number between 0 and 99. The pattern number can be called
by a finishing cycle later in the program.

256
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Rough cutting is done by first cutting parallel to the X axis down to the pattern, leaving the
rough stock. After the cuts along the X axis are completed, a pass is made along the finish
pattern leaving the finish stock.

Feeds and speeds within the pattern are ignored during the parallel cuts. Feeds and speeds are
effective during the pass along the pattern.

Rapid moves within the pattern are effective when following the finish pattern.

Note: If the X rough stock and Z rough stock are both zero, the pass made along the finish
pattern is skipped.

Features concerning pattern/45 degree, pockets, X stock with pockets, and X axis changing
direction are the same as the rough turning cycle.

257
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

These are four patterns made by the Rough Facing cycle. Rough cutting for each of these
patterns is done parallel to the X axis. The signs of U, W, I and K are shown for each pattern.

F2 (Patrn) Main-Prog-Face-Patrn
The Pattern Repeat Cycle repeatedly cuts a pattern incrementing the cuts down to the desired
size. This cycle is used to efficiently cut a part whose shape is already defined (forged or cast).

(U) X Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the X axis.
(W) Z Finish Stock: Distance and direction of the finish allowance in the Z axis.
(I) X Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the X axis.

258
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

(K) Z Rough Stock: Distance and direction of the rough allowance in the Z axis.
(D) Number of Passes: The number of passes to cut the rough stock.
Compensation OFF, LEFT, Tool nose radius compensation.
or RIGHT:
(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the pattern repeat cycle. X and Z return to the
start point at the end of cycle at a rapid feedrate.
(N) Pattern Number: Any number between 0 and 99. The pattern number can be called
by a finishing cycle later in the program.

There are no differences between the turning pattern repeat cycle and the facing pattern repeat
cycle.

Code generated from the Facing Pattern Repeat is identical to that of the Turning Pattern
Repeat.

F3 (Finsh) Main-Prog-Face-Finsh
After rough cutting with the Rough Facing Cycle or Pattern Repeat Cycle, the Finishing Cycle
can be used to remove the finish stock.

(N) Pattern Number: Any pattern defined by a rough facing or pattern repeat cycle.
(F) Feedrate: The feedrate to cut the finish pattern. Any feedrates within the
pattern will be effective.
(S) Spindle Speed: The spindle speed to cut the finish pattern. Any spindle speed
within the pattern will be effective.
(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of the finish cycle. X and Z return to the start point
at the end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.

Note: The only difference between the Finish Facing Cycle and the Finish Turning Cycle is that
the Facing Cycle retracts the Z before the X axis.

Example program using a Rough Facing Cycle with a Finish Cycle.

Conversation Program C:\LATHE\PARTS\P0333

259
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 0 of 10
Program Set-Up
Program name [EXAMPLE FACING PROG.]
Dimensions [ABSOLUTE]
Units [ENGLISH]
Material Length P[3 ]
Material Diameter P[3 ]d
__________________________________________________
Event 1 of 10
Tool Change
[Tool Change ]
Tool Number T[1 ]
Tool Description [RUFF FACING ]
Feed Per [Revolution] F[.01 ]
Spindle [Constant Surface Speed]
Max Spindle Speed RPM[2000 ]
Spindle Speed S[500 ]
Spindle Restart [CW]
Coolant [ON]
__________________________________________________
Event 2 of 10
Rough Facing Setup
X Finish Stock U[.005 ]d
Z Finish Stock W[.02 ]
X Rough Stock I[.005 ]r
Z Rough Stock K[.02 ]
1st Z depth V[-.02 ]
Cut Increment D[.03 ]
Relief [PATTERN]
Clearance R[0 ]
Compensation [OFF]
Start Point X[3.1 ]d
Z[.1 ]
Pattern Number N[1 ]
Note: Geometry between this Event
and End Cycle define the Pattern.
__________________________________________________
Event 3 of 10
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [RAPID]
Coordinates [CARTESIAN]
X-Axis X[ ]d
Z-Axis Z[-1 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [OFF]
__________________________________________________

260
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 4 of 10
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [CARTESIAN]
X-Axis X[2 ]d
Z-Axis Z[ ]
End [---]
__________________________________________________
Event 5 of 10
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [CARTESIAN]
X-Axis X[1 ]d
Z-Axis Z[-.5 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [OFF]
__________________________________________________
Event 6 of 10
Geometry - Line
Feedrate [ ]
Coordinates [CARTESIAN]
X-Axis X[ ]d
Z-Axis Z[.1 ]
End [---]
Extend Back [OFF]
__________________________________________________
Event 7 of 10
End Cycle
__________________________________________________

261
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Event 8 of 10
Tool Change
[Tool Change]
Tool Number T[2 ]
Tool Description [FINISH FACING ]
Feed Per [Revolution] F[.007 ]
Spindle [Constant Surface Speed]
Max Spindle Speed RPM[2000 ]
Spindle Speed S[600 ]
Spindle Restart [CW]
Coolant [ON]
__________________________________________________
Event 9 of 10
Finish Facing
Pattern Number N[1 ]
Feedrate F[ ]
Spindle Speed S[ ]
Start Point X[3.1 ]d
Z[.1 ]
__________________________________________________
Event 10 of 10
End of Program
Spindle Off [Yes]
Coolant Off [Yes]

Y Position (home relative) [ ]

X Position (home relative) [ ]
__________________________________________________

262
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

The above program produces the graphics shown below.

F4 (Cyc B) Main-Prog-Face-Cyc B
Cycle B is used to make a single facing cut. The cycle rapids to the Z cutting depth, makes the
cut, retracts Z axis and rapids back to the start point. Tapered cuts are allowed.

-OR-

263
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

-OR-

Compensation OFF, LEFT or Tool nose radius compensation.

RIGHT:
ABSOLUTE or INCREMENTAL: Toggles between absolute dimensions (diameter, end point)
and incremental dimensions (depth and length).
(F) Feedrate: The feedrate to face the part.
(S) Spindle Speed: The spindle speed to face the part.
(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of Cycle B. X and Z return to the start point
at the end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.
(X) Diameter: The diameter to face to.
(X) End Point: The end point of the cut.
(U) Depth: The incremental X distance and direction from the start
point to the diameter to face to.
(W) Length: The length and direction of the cut in Z from the start point.
(I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper to face.

264
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Tapered Cut For Cycle B Absolute And Incremental Dimensions

265
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

When using Cycle B with incremental dimensions, the signs of the depth, length and taper
indicate the direction shown in the figures above.

Note: Lines, Arcs, Tangents and 3 Point Circle Generators in Facing are identical to the Lines,
Arcs, Tangents and 3 Point Circle Generators in the Turning Section.

266
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F4 (Thrd) Main-Prog-Thrd
The F4 (Thrd) selection brings up the following soft keys for threading:

F1 (Multp) Main-Prog-Thrd-Multp
The multiple thread cutting cycle is used to make multiple passes on a thread using one of four
different cutting methods.

- OR-

- OR-

267
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Crest or Root and Height: If Crest is selected, only the crest diameter is entered and the root and
height are calculated from the crest diameter and tool nose angle. The
crest selection is useful for sharp V threads. If root and height are
selected those two items must be entered. This is used for threads
other than sharp V. (See items 4, 4a and 4b.)
Straight or Tapered: If Straight is selected no taper is entered. If Taper is selected then a
taper must be entered.
(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of threading cycle. X and Z return to the start point
after each pass on the thread at a rapid feedrate.
(X( Crest Diameter: The major diameter for external threads or the minor diameter for
internal threads.
(X) Root Diameter: The minor diameter for external threads or the major diameter for
internal threads.
(K) Height: Height of the thread specified as a radius value.
(Z) End Point: The end of the thread.
(I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper to turn. (This is a radius value.)
(F) Lead: Lead of the thread.
(Q) Start Angle: Shift angle of the thread start angle. Used for multiple threads, i.e.
shift 180º, 120º etc. 0º thru 360º are allowed.
Chamfer Length: Length of the chamfer on the end of the thread.
Chamfer Angle: The angle of the chamfer on the end of the thread. Angles 0º thru 90º
will work for all threads, where 0º is straight out and 90º is no
chamfer for a straight thread.
(D) First Cut Amount: Cutting depth of the first cut. (This is a radius value.)
Tool Nose Angle: The read angle of the tool nose.
Minimum Cut: When the cutting amount is less than the minimum cut, the cutting
amount is clamped at the finishing allowance. (This is a radius value).
Finish Passes: The last pass can be repeated a number of times. If the finish pass is 0
or 1 the last pass will be made one time.
Cutting Method: Constant Amount/1 Edge - Cutting amount constant, single edge
cutting.
Constant Amount/Both Edges - Cutting amount constant, both edges
cutting.
Constant Depth/1 Edge – Cutting amount constant, single edge
cutting.
Constant Depth/Both Edges - Cutting depth constant, both edges
cutting.

268
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Inside or outside threads are determined

by the start point relative to the diameter.
The direction of the taper is determined
by the sign of I.

The tapers are the same as those shown

in the cycle A.

When the crest option is selected, the

root diameter is calculated from the crest
diameters, the tool nose angle, the tool
nose radius and the lead.

269
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

When the root and height option is selected

the crest diameter is calculated from the root
diameter, the thread height and the lead.

270
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

The four cutting methods are shown below:

Constant Depth/1 Edge Constant Amount/1 Edge

Constant Amount/Both Edges Constant Depth/Both Edges

If the cutting depths using constant amount one edge, or constant amount both edges, becomes
less than the finish allowance, the cutting depths are clamped at the finish allowance.

271
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F2 (Cyc 1) Main-Prog-Thrd-Cyc 1
Cycle 1 is used to make a single threading cut. The cycle rapids to the X cutting depth, makes the
threading cut, retracts X axis and rapids back to the start point. Tapered threads are allowed.
Threads must be cut in inches per revolutions.

-OR-

-OR-

ABSOLUTE or INCREMENTAL: Toggles between absolute dimensions (diameter, end point)

and incremental dimensions (depth and length).
(X,Z) Start Point: The start point of Cycle 1. X and Z return to the start point
at the end of the cycle at a rapid feedrate.
(X) Diameter: The root diameter to thread.

272
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

(U) Depth: The incremental X distance and direction from the start
point to the diameter to thread.
(Z) End Point: The end point of the thread.
(W) Length: The length and direction of the thread in Z from the start
point.
(I) Taper: The amount and direction of the taper to thread.
(F) Lead: Lead of the thread.
(Q) Start Angle: Shift angle of the thread start angle. Used for multiple
threads, i.e. shift 180º, 120º etc. 0º thru 360º are allowed.
Chamfer Length: Length of the chamfer on the end of the thread.
Chamfer Angle: The angle of the chamfer on the end of the thread. Angles
0º thru 90º will work for all threads, where 0º is straight out
and 90º is no chamfer for a straight thread.

Straight Cutting Using Cycle 1 With Incremental Dimensions

273
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Tapered Cut Using Cycle 1 with Incremental Dimensions

274
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

When using Cycle 1 with Incremental Dimensions, the signs of the depth, length and taper
indicate the directions shown in the above figures.

F5 (Line) Main-Prog-Thrd-Line
Thread Lines are used for a single thread. The start of the thread is the initial position of the
machine.

The line defined by the thread line is identical to the lines used in turning or facing with the
additional threading information for the line.

-OR-

275
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F5 (Drill) Main-Prog-Drill
There are a variety of different drilling cycles available in the conversational programming
system. The different cycles are available by toggling the first field on the drill screen. A
position move should be commanded before the drill cycle. The Drill Cycle drills a hole at
the current position.

The position move must be made to the location of hole to be drilled, tapped or start of the
groove before the cycle is called. None of the drill cycles are modal; they are one shot
cycles. Each cycle is detailed below.

Drill Cycle
The drill cycle rapids to the Z clearance plane, feeds to the Z depth, and then rapids to the
clearance plane or initial position.

Pierce Feedrate: Z feedrate for drilling the hole.

Return point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane
at the end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid back to the
Z dimension the tool was at before the drill cycle started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning drill cycle.
Final Z Depth: The depth to drill the hole to.

276
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Drill Dwell Cycle

The Drill Dwell Cycle is identical to the Drill Cycle with the addition of a Dwell at the bottom of
the hole.

Pierce Feedrate: Z feedrate for drilling the hole.

Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the
end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid back to the Z
dimension the tool was at before the drill cycle started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the drill cycle.
Final Z Depth: The depth to drill the hole.
Dwell: Time in seconds to dwell at the bottom of the hole.

277
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Drill Peck Cycle

The Drill Peck Cycle is useful for drilling deep holes. It drills to successive depths, then rapids
out of the hole and back to a peck clearance for each depth. The sign or direction of the Z
increment and peck clearance assumes drilling is done from tail stock towards the chuck.

Pierce Feedrate: Z Feedrate for drilling the hole.

278
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the
end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid back to the Z
dimension the tool was at before the drill cycle starts.
Clearance: Z rapids back to the clearance at the beginning of the drill cycle.
Final Z Depth: The depth to drill the hole to.
First Z Depth: First peck depth.
Z Increment: Unsigned amount to drill in each successive peck.
Peck Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid to above the previous depth.

Face Grooving Cycle

The Face Grooving Cycle can be used as fast peck drilling cycle by leaving the last three fields
blank. The fast peck cycle is similar to the peck cycle except the fast cycle does not pull out to

279
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

the clearance; it pulls out the peck increment. There are four possible patterns going tail stock to
chuck or vice versa, and outside to inside or vice versa.

The sign (or direction) of the Z increment, peck clearance and peck up increment are determined
by the direction of the final Z depth to the initial Z position.

The sign (or direction) of the X increment and relief are determined by the direction of the final
diameter to the initial X position.

If the final diameter and the X increment are blank, the sign of the relief is valid and it
determines its direction.

Pierce Feedrate: Z feedrate for grooving the slot.

Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance
plane at the end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid
back to the Z dimension the tool was at before the grooving cycle
started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the grooving cycle.
Final Z Depth: The depth to slot the groove to.
First Z Depth: First peck depth.
Z Increment: Unsigned amount to groove in each successive peck.
Peck Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid to above the previous depth.
Peckup Increment: Unsigned distance to rapid up each peck.
Z Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave on the bottom of the groove
before making a final pass. (See Note 1 below.)
Final Diameter: The diameter to cut the groove to. The starting diameter is the X
dimension the tool is at when the grooving cycle started.
X Increment: The unsigned amount to step over along the face. (This is a radius
value.)
Relief: Amount to back X away at the bottom of the groove before
retracting X to the Z clearance.
X Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave on each side of the groove
before making a final pass. (This is radius value.)
Ignore 1st Relief Yes will skip the X axis retract to avoid dragging out of the groove
on the first pass. No will do the relief on all of the retracts.

280
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Cutter Comp Yes will adjust the groove size based on the tool radius. The
software checks for specific tool types and will give an error if the
tool type is not valid. No requires that the dimensions of the
groove account for the tool width.

Note 1: If both X and Z finish stocks are zero, then no finish pass is made. If either X or Z stock
is non-zero, a finish pass will be made as follows:

A. Remove the X finish stock at the final diameter side of the groove to the bottom of
the groove.

B. Move to the center of the groove along the bottom.

C. Retract out of the groove.

D. Move to the starting diameter side of the groove.

E. Remove the X finish stock at the starting diameter side of the groove to the bottom
of the groove.

F. Remove the Z stock along the bottom of the groove to the final diameter side.

G. Retract out of the groove.

Note 2: A position move should be made prior to the Face Grooving Cycle so that the X axis is
positioned to the starting side of the groove.

281
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Bore Cycle
The Bore Cycle Feeds to the Z depth and feeds back to the clearance.

Pierce Feedrate: Feedrate for drilling the hole.

Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the
end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid back to the Z
dimension the tool was at before the drill cycle started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the bore cycle.
Final Z Depth: The depth to bore the hole to.

282
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Bore/Dwell Cycle
The Bore/Dwell Cycle is the same as the bore cycle, but a dwell is performed at the bottom of
the hole.

283
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Pierce Feedrate: Z feedrate for drilling the hole.

Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the
end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid back to the Z
dimension the tool was at before the bore/dwell cycle started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the bore/dwell cycle.
Final Z Depth: The hole will be drilled to this depth.
Dwell: Time in seconds to dwell at the bottom of the hole.

284
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Right Tap Cycle

The Right Tap Cycle always runs in FEED/REV and REVS/MINUTE. The spindle is turned on
CW at the start of the cycle and reverses direction (CCW) at the spindle reverse depth.

Spindle on CW RPM: Revs per min to tap at. Note: The spindle will always be turned on
clockwise even if this field is empty.
Threads per Unit: The lead of the tap.
Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance
plane at the end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid
back to the Z dimension the tool was at before the tap cycle started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the tap cycle.
Spindle Reverse Depth: The spindle reverse direction at this depth. It may coast some and
cause the tap to go a little deeper.

285
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Left Tap Cycle

The Left Tap Cycle is similar to the right tap except the left tap cycle turns the spindle on
counterclockwise at the start of the cycle and reverses direction (CW) at the spindle reverse
depth.

286
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Spindle on CCW RPM: Revs per minute to tap at. Note: The spindle will always be turned
on counterclockwise even if this field is empty.
Threads per Unit: Threads per inch or threads per millimeter.
Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance
plane at the end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid
back to the Z dimension the tool was at before the tap cycle started.
Clearance: Z rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the tap cycle.
Spindle Reverse Depth: The spindle reverse direction at this depth. It may coast some and
cause the tap to go a little deeper.

287
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Diameter Grooving Cycle

The Diameter Grooving Cycle is similar to the face grooving cycle except the fast peck cycle is
used on the diameter. If the last three fields are omitted, a single high speed peck cycle is done.
There are four possible patterns going tail stock to chuck or vice versa, and outside towards
center or vice versa.

The sign (or direction) of the X increment, peck clearance, and peck-up increment are
determined by the direction of the final X depth to the initial X diameter.

The sign (or direction) of the Z increment and relief are determined by the Z end point to the
initial Z position. The Z end point and Z increment are blank. The sign of the relief determines
its direction.

Pierce Feedrate: X Feedrate for grooving the slot.

Return Point: CLEARANCE means the tool will rapid back to the clearance plane at the
end of the cycle. INITIAL means the tool will rapid back to the X
dimension the tool was at before the grooving cycle started.
Clearance: X rapids to the clearance at the beginning of the grooving cycle. (This is a
diameter value.)
Final X Depth: The diameter to groove the slot to.
First X Depth: First peck diameter.
X Increment: Unsigned diameter to groove in each successive peck. (This is a radius
value.)
Peck Clearance: Unsigned distance to rapid up after each peck. (This is a radius value.)
PeckUp Increment: Unsigned distance to rapid up after each peck. (This is a radius value.)
X Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave at the bottom of the groove before
making a finish pass. (This is a radius value.) (See Note 1 below.)
Endpoint: The Z dimension to cut the groove to. The start of the groove is the Z
dimension the tool is at when the grooving cycle started.
Z Increment: The unsigned amount to step over.
Relief: Amount to back Z away at the bottom of the groove before retracting to
the X clearance.
Ignore 1st Relief Yes will skip the X axis retract to avoid dragging out of the groove on the
first pass. No will do the relief on all of the retracts.
Cutter Comp Yes will adjust the groove size based on the tool radius. The software
checks for specific tool types and will give an error if the tool type is not

288
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

valid. No requires that the dimensions of the groove account for the tool
width.
Z Finish Stock: The unsigned amount of stock to leave on each side of the groove before
making a finish pass.

Note 1: If both X and Z finish stocks are zero, no finish pass is made. If either X or Z finish
stock is zero, a finish pass will be made as follows:

A. The Z finish stock is removed on the ending side of the groove to the final X depth.

B. Move to the center of the groove along the bottom.

C. Retract X out of the groove.

D. Move to the Z start of the groove.

E. Remove the Z finish stock at the starting edge of the groove to the final X depth.

F. Remove the stock along the bottom of the groove to the ending side of the groove.

G. Retract X out the groove.

Note 2: A position move should be made prior to the Diameter Grooving Cycle so that Z is
positioned to the start of the groove.

289
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F6 (Tool) Main-Prog-Tool
The Tool Change Screen is used for changing tools and tool offsets. The standard tool change
rapids X to the tool change position (set by the tool change position parameter), waits for the tool
change reset signal, then waits for the cycle start signal. This tool change sequence is flexible for
use with a variety of tool changers.

-OR-

-OR-

Tool Number: The tool call will only load the tool offsets for the specified tool.
Tool Description: The tool description is used to prompt the operator when the control is
waiting for the tool change reset signal.
Feed Per: Feed/Revolution or Feed/Minute.
Gear Change: Select Gears 1 through 6.
Spindle: Constant surface speed or revolution/minute.
Max Spindle Speed: If constant surface speed is in effect a maximum spindle speed is used to
clamp the spindle speed.

290
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Spindle Speed: The programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Restart: Spindle restart CW or CCW.
Coolant: Coolant ON.

F7 (Misc) Main-Prog-Misc
As a program is being created it may be necessary to add certain miscellaneous functions, such
as coolant and spindle commands. This is done through the Miscellaneous Screen.

Feed: Per Rev or Per Minute (posts G99 or G98 respectively).

Feedrate: In inches/Rev, mm/Rev, Inches/Min or mm/Min (posts F###.####)
Spindle: Constant surface speed or revolutions per minute (posts G96 or G99
respectively) (if constant surface speed is selected a maximum spindle
speed can be entered)
Spindle Speed: In feet/Min, mm/Min or Revs/Min (posts S###.#)
Gear Change: Low, Medium or High (posts M41, M42, or M93 respectively)
Spindle: CW, CCW or OFF (posts M3, M4 or M5 respectively)
Coolant: ON or OFF (posts M8 or M9 respectively)
Compensation: LEFT, RIGHT, or OFF (Posts G41, G42 or G40 respectively)
Stop Command: Program or Optional (posts M0 or M1 respectively)
Return Command: Z to clearance, X to clearance, Z-X to clearance, X-Z to clearance, Z to
home, X to home, Z-X to home or X-Z to home

Z to Clearance posts G45

X to Clearance posts G46
Z-X to Clearance posts G45, G46
X-Z to Clearance posts G46, G45
Z to Home posts G47
X to Home posts G48
Z-X to Home posts G47, G48
X-Z to Home posts G48, G47

Cutting Mode: Point to Point or Continuous (posts G61 or G64 respectively)

Program Mode: Absolute or Incremental (posts G93 or G91 respectively)
Work Coordinates: 1, 2 . . .6 (posts G54, G55, ...G59 respectively)

291
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

Other Functions: Chuck in, chuck out, bar feed, tail stock in, tail stock out, parts catcher in,
parts catcher out, air blast on, air blast off, accessory 1, accessory 2...
accessory 5
Miscellaneous Line: The Miscellaneous Line is used to type in any M Code, G Code or text
that is not on the standard list.

F7 (Call) Main-Prog-Call
The Program Call screen is used to transfer program execution to another program for a specified
number of loops.

F8 (Spec) Main-Prog-Spec
These are screens for setting or adjusting various parameters in the control. The parameters
control various functions such as scale factors, rotation angles, mirror image, and floating zeroes.

The special selections are:

F1 (Cad) Main-Prog-Spec-Cad
The (Cad) utility is used to import or convert cad files to conversational events. Only lines and
arcs can be imported.

The input screen for Cad:

292
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

The CAD File Path as entered above will import a DXF file from the “C:\CK19\DXF” path. Any
valid path may be specified to locate CAD drawing files. F2 (Menu) key allows part selection
from a list of all files stored on the control or on any drive. The only valid options for the CAD
File Extension field are .DXF and .CDL. This field will default to DXF. If necessary a MISC
parameter can be set to make CDL default.

After the Path key is selected the control will prompt the operator to pick a start point for the
path. The start point is selected by moving the cross hairs to the desired location using the F7
thru F10 keys arrow keys. The jog keys can also be used as well as the F5(Enter) key (the enter
key on the key pad can also be used). After the start point is selected the control will prompt the

293
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

operator to pick a point in the direction you want to cut. This point is selected using the same
method. The control uses these two points to create a path. If you want to create a turning or
facing cycle using the geometry a start and end cycle must be added to the conversational
program.

Note 1: When drawing the Cad file you should consider if you are going to input the path using
front side or back side programming.

If you are using back side programming and the X values in the Cad file are positive
the X values will be positive.

If you are using back side programming and the X values in the Cad file are negative
the X values will be negative.

If you are using front side programming and the X values in the Cad file are positive
the X values will be negative.

If you are using front side programming and the X values in the Cad file are negative
the X values will be positive.

Note 2: When drawing the Cad file be aware that the X dimensions in Cad software refers to
the Z-axis dimensions on the lathe.

Note 3: When drawing the Cad file be aware that the Y dimensions in Cad software refers to
the X-axis dimensions on the lathe.

Note 4: The dimensions in the Cad software are radius values and are converted to diameters
on the lathe.

F3 (Scale) Main-Prog-Spec-Scale

-OR-

294
 SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F4 (Rot) Main-Prog-Spec-Rot

F5 (Mirr) Main-Prog-Spec-Mirr

-OR-

295
SECTION SIX – CONVERSATIONAL INPUT SCREENS

F7 (Flz) Main-Prog-Spec-Flz

End of Program

296
 APPENDIX

Error Messages
001 Invalid function number
Note what just occurred and call for technical support. A call was made to a non-
existent DOS function.

002 File not found

File name specified as OLD does not exist. Try MENU.

003 Path not found

The drive or subdirectory specified does not exist.

004 Too many open files

Check Config.sys for FILES=20.

005 File access denied

The file may be read only or is on a write-protected disk.

006 Invalid file handle

007 Memory control blocks destroyed

008 Insufficient memory

The program being loaded is too large to fit into memory. A program being run or
verified is too large to run in the control's memory. Try DNC mode.

009 Invalid memory block address

010 Invalid environment

011 Invalid format

012 Invalid file access code

013 Invalid data

015 Invalid drive specified

Drive specified does not exist.

016 Cannot remove current directory

Note what just occurred and call for technical support.

017 Cannot rename across drives

297
APPENDIX

018 No more files

100 Disk read error

An attempt was made to edit a file that has been corrupted in some way, perhaps
loss of power while editing, or an error 101 occurred while editing. Try a different
file to see if the problem is specific to one particular file. If this is the case, the
program must be recreated.

Note: This error occurs when trying to edit conversational files that were created
with SLS software.

101 Disk write error - Parts memory is full

To avoid this error, remove programs from memory when you are done using
them (store on a floppy). Also, watch the amount of memory available as you are
programming. Deleting some programs from the parts memory will free up space
for additional programs.

Procedure to recover from ERROR 101

(Disk write error: Parts memory full)

Type in commands that are shown in CAPITAL letters, followed by the ENT key.

1) ENTER (C:/RAM should be displayed)

2) CD.. (change directory)
3) CD PARTS (change to the parts directory)
4) DIR (list PART files)
5) DEL O####(#### is your part number)

NOTE: You can recreate your O#### file from your conversational (P####) file
by reposting it.

6) Power the machine OFF, then ON again, to RESET the control. Use UTIL-
FILES-ERASE to erase programs that are no longer needed.

NOTE: You can check how much parts memory is available by using UTIL-INFO
to look at the information page.

102 File not assigned

103 File not open

104 File not open for input

105 File not open for output

106 Invalid numeric format

298
 APPENDIX

150 Disk is write-protected

Check the write protect tab on the floppy disk that is being used.

151 Unknown unit

152 Drive not ready

Check to see that there is a disk in the floppy drive.

153 Unknown command

154 CRC error in data

The disk being read is corrupted.

155 Bad drive request structure length

156 Disk seek error

Check the cabling from the control to the floppy drive.

157 Unknown media type

158 Sector not found

159 Printer out of paper

160 Device write fault

161 Device read fault

162 Hardware failure

Improper format on the floppy disk. Try another disk or try reformatting the same
disk. Verify that floppy cables are properly connected.

163 Sharing Violation

182 Obsolete controller software for this system

183 Obsolete acroloop software for this system

184 Obsolete keyboard software for this system

185 Obsolete bit access for ncb controller

299
APPENDIX

186 Also appears as error 954.

Control (NCB card) not detected – occurring during power-up
All Centurion 6, 7, and 7000 Series. The control did not write the proper signature
into the dual-port memory, indicating that it was present.
Causes:
1. Bad NCB card.
2. Motherboard not setup correctly so that the dual-port memory does not function
correctly. For example, motherboards with disk-on-chip needed a jumper such
that the adderss of the disk-on-chip firmware did not reside at address D0000 hex,
the same as the dual-port memory.

187 Also appears as error 955.

Interface card not detected – occurring during power-up
Centurion 7 and 7000 series only
CNC Version 206 and newer
The proper information was not received over the fiber-optic link from the
interface card that would indicate that it was functioning.
CAUSES:
1. Fiber-optic cable not attached at both ends.
2. Bad interface card.
3. Bad ncb card, since it must receive the information from the interface card.
4. Bad fiber-optic cable.

188 Also appears as error 956.

Interface card communication failure
Centurion 7 and 7000 Series only
CNC Version 238 and newer
NCB Firmware 3.19 and newer
No information was received from the interface card for 10 heartbeats of the
control, about .01 seconds.
CAUSES:
1. Fiber-optic cable loose.
2. Bad interface card.
3. Bad NCB card, since it must receive the information from the interface card.
4. Bad fiber-optic cable.

189 Also appears as error 957.

Watchdog Failure
Centurion 7 and 7000 Series only
CNC Version 238 and newer
NCB Firmware 3.19 and newer
Interface Firmware 1.11 and newer
The interface card reported that it dropped the watchdog because no information
was received from the ncb card for about 3 heartbeats, about .003 seconds.
CAUSES:
1. Fiber-optic cable loose.

300
 APPENDIX

2. Bad ncb card.

3. Bad interface card, since it must receive the information from the ncb card.
4. If software versions do not support error #194, a power glitch at the interface
card caused the interface card to reset (the interface card comes up with the
watchdog off).
5. It is at least possible communication in one direction would work and not in
the other. Especially since each direction has an independent channel, including a
separate fiber optic cable. I would think this error would be very rare, especially
now that “interface reset” will get you a separate error.

190 Also appears as error 958.

Unexpected control (NCB card) reset
Centurion 7 and 7000 Series only
CNC Version 255 and newer
NCB Firmware 3.23 and newer
The NCB card reset sometime after power-up, the only time it should reset.
CAUSES:
1. Power glitch at the NCB card.
2. Noise on the PC bus reset line, which is tied to the NCB card reset line.
Keyboard cards with "PLD logic version" AC hex (instead of the current B0 hex)
allowed the PC reset line to float, making it susceptible to noise.

191 Also appears as error 959.

Unknown PLC (Hex file) failure
Centurion 7 and 7000 Series only
CNC Version 262 and newer
NCB Firmware 3.27 and newer
The ncb tasks did not get serviced in the last 256 heartbeats of the NCB card,
about .25 seconds.
CAUSES:
1. An NCB task stalled, indicating it was not properly written by our software
dept. There was one older lathe NCB file that had this problem
2. Some older NCB firmware versions overloaded the processor, not allowing any
time for the tasks.

192 Also appears as error 960.

Control (NCB card) Failure
Centurion 6, 7, and 7000 Series
CNC Version 268 and newer
The NCB card did not respond for a long period of time.
CAUSES:
1. Bad NCB card.
2. CNC versions 268-279 erroneously caused this error if block on and block off
where pressed in quick succession.

301
APPENDIX

193 Software Watchdog Error

8000 Series only – error not covered here.

194 Unexpected interface (card) reset

Centurion 7 and 7000 Series only
CNC version 289 and newer
NCB Firmware 3.30 and newer
Interface Firmware 1.12
The interface card reset sometime after power-up, the only time it should reset.
CAUSES:
1. A power glitch at the interface card caused the interface card to reset (the
interface card comes up with the watchdog off).

200 Division by zero

201 Range check error

202 Stack overflow

203 Heap overflow - Insufficient RAM memory

If you are running a large program, try running it through the RS-232 RUN mode.

204 Invalid pointer operation

205 Floating point overflow

206 Floating point underflow

207 Invalid floating point operation

208 TP Overlay Error

209 TP Overlay Error

210 TP Object Error

211 TP Object Error

212 TP Object Error

213 TP Object Error

214 TP Object Error

300 Program already exists

An attempt was made to use a program name already in use. Use a different name.

302
 APPENDIX

301 Invalid program number

Valid program numbers are 1 through 9999.
* Simulator program numbers are 1 through 15.

302 No programs to select from

This error may occur anytime a menu is being created for file selection when
there are no files. There may be an unformatted disk in the floppy drive. Parts
memory may be empty.

303 Problem saving program(s) to disk

There is no floppy disk in the disk drive. The floppy disk may not have room to
store additional files. There may be an unformatted disk in the drive.

304 Problem loading program(s) from disk

Disk was removed from floppy drive after setting files.

305 Not formatted for conversational. Try text editor.

306 Conversational system has been corrupted

307 Illegal event number

Event number in conversational program is negative.

308 Invalid tool number

Tool number is less than zero or greater than 99.

309 Can't copy or rename a file to itself

Try using a different file name.

310 File not formatted for conversational or parameters

Problem receiving a file via RS-232. Check to see if the proper file was sent.

311 Parameter file not valid

Problem receiving parameter file via RS-232. Check to see if the parameters were
sent.

312 Insufficient parts storage

Parts memory is full. Try erasing some programs from the parts directory
(UTILS-FILES-ERASE).
Program on floppy disk may be too large to fit into the control's memory.

313 Insufficient storage for compression, unable to post the file

Erase some programs from the parts memory.

314 Insufficient storage, post has been aborted

303
APPENDIX

Erase some programs from the parts memory.

315 Out of storage space on the floppy

Floppy disk is full or has too many programs. There is a limit of 224 files that can
be stored in the root directory on a floppy disk. A sub-directory can be created on
the floppy disk and the floppy path changed to save files to the sub-directory. This
allows full use of the disk space.

316 Not enough storage to create a new file

There is not enough parts space to create a new conversational program. Erase
unnecessary programs to free up parts space.

317 Simulator allows only 15 events

319 Send file aborted

320 Invalid PLC program.

One of the ACRO.HEX (or NCB.HEX) files in the RAM directory is corrupt.

321 Error in program O.

A custom MCODE or custom GCODE has an error.

322 or custom G code program not found.

323 or custom M code program not found.

324 Invalid path or program not found for M6 tool change macro.
The tool change macro may have an error in it.

400 Home required

The machine must be homed before any axis movement can take place on the
machine, i.e. MDI, JOG, HDW, etc.

401 X axis software limit overtravel

403 Z axis software limit overtravel

These errors are a result of the axis reaching the programmed limits of travel.

When jogging or handwheeling and an axis limit is reached, the control will only
allow movement in one direction.

In a program the error may be encountered. The G50 and/or G54 parameters may
need to be modified.

Tool length offsets are also a potential cause of axis overtravel.

304
 APPENDIX

407 X axis excess error condition

409 Z axis excess error condition

These errors are caused by the axis not being able to keep up with the
programmed move at the programmed speed.

Does the error occur during rapid moves only? Y__ N__
If so, check bus voltage and rapid feed parameters.

Other causes might be too heavy of a cut, worn tool, low 15 volts, accel/decel
parameters, or drive card failure.

413 Attempted to move into safe zone

415 Can't establish DNC link while program is running

The program being run must be halted before the DNC link can be established.

416 Out of position, arc end point is not on the arc

417 Can't edit parameters while program is running

The program must be halted before editing parameters.
Is the program in block mode or feedhold?

418 Controller Card Error

448 Air Pressure Error. Check air hose connection

449 Emergency stop: Axis drive fault. Reset servo drives or power down.

450 Emergency stop condition. Reset drives or press <ESC> to clear this message.

451 Lube fault, Check Waylube Level

The float switch on the autolube pump is indicating that oil needs to be added to
the autolube tank.

456 Can't process auto tool change after switching to manual

457 Move length too great for control (split into smaller moves)

460 Feedrate too large for control.

500 Last softkey pressed is not supported at this time

501 Illegal address "#" encountered

The character within quotes " " is not a valid address, such as X, Y, Z, R, G, etc.
The block where the error occurred is shown in the block display. Check that

305
APPENDIX

block for the invalid address.

502 Undefined canned cycle

503 Return without gosub

Refer to page 117, Section Four about gosub and return.

504 Coincident points, the start point and end point are the same on an arc without
a center
The start point and end point are the same on an arc without a center.

505 Radius too small to span given points

Start and end points are more than "R" distance apart.

507 After compensation, line to arc lacks intersection

509 After compensation, arcs lack intersection

515 Unexpected file size

The control read a file that was not the correct size.

517 Parameter out of range

Parameter number is less than zero. For parameter numbers greater than 699 you
must use data mode (G10, G11).

518 Illegal program statement

Command in program statement is not considered valid.

519 Feedrate out of range

The programmed feedrate is beyond the "maximum feedrate" parameter value in
the machine setup parameters. The program feedrate may be negative.

520 Spindle speed out of range

The programmed spindle speed is beyond the "spindle range" parameter in the
machine setup parameters. The programmed spindle speed may be negative.

521 Negative arc radius

An attempt was made to generate a negative arc radius.

522 Negative polar radius

A polar radius must be specified as a positive value.

523 Illegal tool number

Valid T numbers are 0 - 24.

306
 APPENDIX

526 Invalid access code

The access code does not match that which is loaded in the machine setup
parameters.

527 Invalid access level

Valid levels are 0 - 4.

529 Duplicate address' encountered

The same address was found twice on the same block, such as X0 Z0 X.5.

530 Colinear line to line in round corner

531 Colinear line to arc in round corner

532 Colinear arc to line in round corner

533 Colinear arc to arc in round corner

535 Chamfer length is < 0

Chamfer length must be a positive number.

536 Can't chamfer and round the same corner

Choose either chamfer or round corner.

537 Can't chamfer to or from arcs

538 Loop counter out of range

The maximum number of loops for a call is 999.

539 Dwell time out of range

Probably a negative number was specified. The maximum dwell time is
999999999 seconds.

540 Illegal dwell time "#" encountered

Try G4 F##.####; specify X, P, or F after G4.

541 No axis moves are allowed on a G45, G46, G47 or G48 block
Relocate X and Z moves to another block.

542 G30 Illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block

Should be P2, P3, or P4 for second, third, and fourth reference point.

543 Illegal G10 statement

307
APPENDIX

544 Too many digits in number

The number of digits used is beyond what the address is expecting. For example,
G100 should only be two digits.

546 Nested calls or gosubs too deep

Probably a program is calling itself. Nest limit is 50 for program calls.

547 Comment not closed

Always use "( )" (parentheses) in pairs for program comments.

549 Unrecognized G code

G code encountered is not recognized by the control.

550 Bad numeric format

Expecting a numeric value, or a parameter value enclosed within [ ], after an
address X, Y, Z, R, etc.

551 Multiple decimal points

Multiple decimal points were detected within one numeric value.

552 Missing "]"

Always use square brackets in pairs.

553 Missing "["

Always use square brackets in pairs.

554 Tangent function overflow

Trying to find the tangent of a number close to 90º

555 Missing "/"

Arctan "ATAN" syntax is P## = ATAN[#/#].

556 Negative SQRT argument

557 Unknown function

560 Illegal relational operator

567 Unresolved call

Program being called does not exist (Call ####).

568 Unresolved goto or gosub

N#### does not exist in the program (Goto ####).

569 The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "Compensated radius is too small"
Eliminate the arc, or use a smaller tool.

308
 APPENDIX

570 The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "1st compensated radius in arc to arc
is < 0"
Eliminate the arc, or use a smaller tool.

571 The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "2nd compensated radius in arc to arc
is < 0"
Eliminate the arc, or use a smaller tool.

576 Z increment is 0

579 Compensated arcs do not intersect

580 Invalid floating point operation. The argument passed to the LN function was
zero or negative.

581 Invalid floating point operation. The Operand passed to the "**" function was
zero or negative

582 X must be monotonously increasing or decreasing in type 1 of G71 rough cycle.

Pockets are not allowed in the ruff turning cycle with 45º relief.

583 Z must be monotonously increasing or decreasing in the G71 rough cycle. Z

axis can not change directions in the ruff turning cycle.

584 X value exceeds starting X in G71 rough cycle

585 Z must be monotonously increasing or decreasing in type 1 of G72 rough cycle.

Pockets are not allowed in the ruff facing cycle with 45º relief.

586 X must be monotonously increasing or decreasing in G72 rough cycle. X axis

cannot change directions in the ruff facing cycle.

587 Z value exceeds starting Z in G72 rough cycle

588 Can't set tool offsets for tool #0

600 Can't nest -WHILE WEND loops-

601 Missing WHILE statement

602 Missing WEND statement

309
APPENDIX

603 Program N#### does not exist

Program being called as a subprogram does not exist. Check to see if the program
called is in the memory.

605 Can't modify dry run status while program is running

Program must be halted before changing dry run status.
Try HALT-DRY-RESUME.

606 Program N#### is empty

Text program being run or verified is empty. Try editing and reposting the
conversational file.

607 Can't exit DNC run mode while program is running

The DNC mode must be halted before exiting.

608 'P' expected in M98 block

609 G20/21 not allowed in DNC Fast

610 Position move required after this rotation

611 Feed must be specified in every block while inverse time mode is active

900 RS232 overrun error (The system sending data may not have the same baud
rate as the CNC)
Check RS-232 baud rate parameter in PARMS-CTRL.

901 RS232 parity error (The system sending data may not have the same parity as
the CNC)
Check RS-232 parity parameter in PARMS-CTRL.

902 RS232 framing error (Remote system and CNC may not have the same line
settings or a loose cable)
Check line settings in PARMS-CTRL for baud rate, parity, and stop bits.

903 RS232 break detected (RS232 cable may be loose)

Check cabling and connectors for good contact.

950 Obsolete controller software for this system

951 Obsolete acroloop software for this system

952 Obsolete keyboard software for this system

953 Obsolete bit access for ncb controller.

310
 APPENDIX

954 Control not detected.

955 Interface not detected.

956 Interface communication failure

957 Watchdog failure

958 Unexpected Control Reset

959 Unknown PLC Failure

960 Control Failure

Byte Parameters
000 Parameter File Version
016 Cartesian Inch Leading Digits
017 Cartesian Inch Trailing Digits
018 Cartesian Metric Leading Digits
019 Cartesian Metric Trailing Digits
020 Angle Inch Leading Digits
021 Angle Inch Trailing Digits
022 Angle Metric Leading Digits
023 Angle Metric Trailing Digits
024 Spindle Inch Leading Digits
025 Spindle Inch Trailing Digits
026 Spindle Metric Leading Digits
027 Spindle Metric Trailing Digits
028 Feed Inch Leading Digits
029 Feed Inch Trailing Digits
030 Feed Metric Leading Digits
031 Feed Metric Trailing Digits
040 RS-232 Change Line-Feed to Carriage Return Linefeed In
041 Send Carriage returns and Linefeeds at the end of each RS-232 block.
042 Key-Board code
045 Machine Version
046 Force Front Panel Spindle
047 Minimum Parts Space
048 use G92 instead of G54 in the Hand-Wheel and Jog screens
049 Extract programs with O##### in RS-232 and Files Load
050 Spindle Range
051 Number of ATC Pockets
053 Resolve Programs in DNC (for GOTOs)
055 Disable 417 Errors
057 Door Open Switch

311
APPENDIX

058 Use Small Soft Keys

059 Load Tool Offsets
061 Use S Curves
062 Primary Hdw Encoder
063 Look Ahead in Run Mode
064 Initial Units Inch or Metric
065 Number of Axis
066 Feed per Min/Revs (Power On)
067 Spindle RPM/CSF (Power On)
068 Spindle Axis
069 Tool Change Type
070 Run Rapid 100%
071 Dry Run Rapid 100%
072 Spindle on in Dry Run
073 Tool Table Diameters\Radius
075 Load Engraving Cycles
076 Load Canned Cycles
077 Check Spindle up to Speed
078 Check Spindle Zero Speed
079 G18 is ZX or XZ plane
080 Cad Type DXF or CDL
081 Special Flags
082 Offset Round and Tapered Walls
083 Full Dos File Names
085 Primary Serial Port
086 COM1 Baud Rate;
087 COM1 Data/Stop Bits and Parity
088 COM2 Baud Rate;
089 COM2 Data/Stop Bits and Parity
090 Tape Start Character
091 Tape Stop Character
092 RS-232 Buffer Size
093 Secondary Serial Port
094 RS-232_End of file character
095 Front/Rear Turret
096 Power up with Block Skip On
097 Power up with Optional Stop On
099 Display Multiple Block Lines
100-109 Post M-code Table
110-119 Custom G-code Table
120-129 Custom M-code Table
130-145 M6 Macro File Name
146 Drive on Menus
160-175 Report File Name
176-183 Thermo Comp Axes
188 Rapid S Curves

312
 APPENDIX

189 Tap Up Double RPM

190 Check Air Pressure
204 Electronic Spindle Gears
205 Omatec Control
206 Show current position in E-Stop
209 Spindle Dac Value
210 Spindle Acceleration Rate
211 Spindle Deceleration Rate
212 Second Handwheel Encoder
213 Probe Axis
214 Probe Input
215 Cranking Factor (for hand-wheeling thru a program)
216 IPR Scale (IprScale allows a higher max IPR than normal, e.g. a factor
of two doubles the range at the expense of halving the normal max
spindle rate)
217 Two Hand-wheel Timing
218 Serial Key board
219 European Code
220 Door Open Axis
221 Door Open Input
222 Door Over-Ride Axis
223 Door Over-Ride Input
226 Manual Panel
227 End of Cycle Axis in Manual Mode
228 End of Cycle Output in Manual Mode
229 Yaskawa Axis Drives
230 Third Hand-Wheel Axis
232 Video Mode
233 Screen Blank Back Light
237 Run Look Ahead Blocks
275-291 Foreign Extension
292 Auxiliary Safety Axis
293 Auxiliary Safety Input
294 Blocks of Look Ahead in Fast DNC
295 Reverse Spindle in Back-Gear
296 Check control over temperature
299 Holes In Turret
300-315 Utility Command
320-335 Machine Type
338-353 Mechanical Version
354-369 Electrical Version
371 Safe Zone on at Power Up
372 Remote Hand-wheel Axis1
373 Remote Hand-wheel Axis2
376-391 Machine Serial Number
394 Acc Settle Milli-Secs

313
APPENDIX

395 Dec Settle Milli-Secs

397 New Thread Crest
398 Sort Directories by Name
399 Lathe Tool Set for Tool 1
400 Ignore Tool Radius too Large Errors
401 Wears by Radius
403 M6 Turret in Handwheel
404 Front Panel Type
405 Aux Auger Button
406 Aux Setup Button
407 Door Open Jog
408 Jog Over-Ride Axis
409 Jog Over-Ride Input
411 Tool Setting Any Tool, Current Tool
412 Aux Spindle Jog
413 Check SW Limits
415 Remote HDW Encoder
416 Quill Scale Encoder
417 Smoothing Off
418 Spindle Load Flag
419 Tool Load Monitor 0=Off 1=E-Stop 2=Feed Hold 3=Block Mode On
4=Set Flag – No Message 5=Message Only
473 Check Spindle Gear Mismatch
475 Tool Setting Use Work Offsets
476 Feedhold G1 and No Spindle
477 Watch Spindle up to Speed
478 Over-temp Axis
479 Over-temp Input
492 Clutch Trip Axis
493 Clutch Trip Input
494 Home Baruffaldi
496 Restrictive Edit Key
499 Fast Pragatti Index
530 Chip Remove Time
531 Half Manual Panel
532 Wash Down on Time
533 Wash Down off Time
535 Cool Down (used for way lube pump time on Indian lathe)
536 Lube Cycle time (used for way lube cycle time on Indian lathe)
537 Yaskawa2 Drives
539 Clamp Type
542 Yaskawa M5 drive
543 Machine State 0=Nothing 1=Verifying 2=Program Running
544 Check Spindle in Gear
545 Front Panel Flags
- Bit Definitions -

314
 APPENDIX

FPFLAGS_HOLD_TOOL_CHANGE $01;
FPFLAGS_NOT_OVERRIDE_SWITCH $02;
FPFLAGS_RAPID_OVERRIDE $04;
FPFLAGS_LEDS $08;
FPFLAGS_NOT_MANUAL_PANEL $10;
549 Check Up To Speed2 (Copy of PB77 for use in NCB files)
551 Upto Speed Axis
552 Upto Speed Input

315
APPENDIX

Real Parameters
Great care must be taken when writing to any parameters other than the User Parameters
P00-P99.

P00- User Parameters P151 X Init Level

P99 P152 X Axis Drill
P156 Material Length
P100 Thread Variable Lead P157 Material Diam
P101 Lead
P102 Shift Angle P158-P171 Unassigned
P103 Thread Chamfer Length
P104 Tread Chamfer Angle P172 Mirror position axis 1 (Z)
P105 Thread Type P173 Mirror position axis 2 (X)
P106 Thread Height P180 Scale position axis 1 (Z)
P107 First Cut Depth P181 Scale position axis 2 (X)
P108 Tool Angle P188 Scale factor axis 1 (Z)
P110 Start Block P196 Rotate K position
P111 End Block P197 Rotate I position
P112 X Finish Stock P198 Angle of rotation
P113 Z Finish Stock P199 Abs / Inc on G76…G79
P114 X Rough Stock P200 Previous position (Z)
P115 Z Rough Stock P201 Previous position (X)
P116 Cut Increment P208 Current position (Z)
P117 Rufcut Type P209 Current position (X)
P118 Clearance P216 Previous machine (Z)
P119 First Depth P217 Previous machine (X)
P121 Cut Length P224 Current machine (Z)
P122 Cut Depth P225 Current machine (X)
P123 End Point P232 Work offset axis 1 (Z)
P124 Diameter P233 Work offset axis 2 (X)
P125 Turning Taper P240 Tool offset axis 1 (Z)
P126 Facing Taper P241 Tool offset axis 2 (X)
P130 Minimum Cut P248 Arc radius
P131 FinishPasses P149 Arc K value
P139 X Rplane P250 Arc I value
P140 Z Rplane P251 Feedrate
P141 Final Z depth P252 Dwell
P142 Z initial Level P253 Spindle speed
P143 Z increment P254 Temporary Z position
P144 First Z depth P255 Temporary X position
P145 Z Feedrate P260 Active tool number
P146 Peckup Increment P261 Active tool radius
P147 Peck Clearance P262 Active tool shape
P148 Dwell 1 P266 Zone status
P149 Dwell 2 P267 Unit ratio

316
 APPENDIX

P268 Pending tool P430 Work coordinate 4 (Z)

P270 Temporary K P431 Work coordinate 4 (X)
P271 Temporary I P436 Work coordinate 5 (Z)
P298 Max Spindle Speed P437 Work coordinate 5 (X)
P300 Modal 00 P442 Work coordinate 6 (Z)
P301 Modal 01 P443 Work coordinate 6 (X)
P302 Modal 02 P448 Tool change position (Z)
P303 Modal 03 P449 Tool change position (X)
P304 Data mode P454 Positive safe zone (Z)
P306 Interpolate P455 Positive safe zone (X)
P309 Cutter compensation P460 Negative safe zone (Z)
P310 Canned cycle P461 Negative safe zone (X)
P311 Dimension P466 Finish Stock
P312 Feed unit P474 Clamped Feedrate
P313 Spindle unit P517 Feed % Reducer
P315 Linear unit P698 Parts Counter Increment
P316 Scale P699 Parts Counter
P317 Rotate P790 Spindle Range 1
P318 Mirror P791 Spindle Range 2
P319 Work system P792 Spindle Range 3
P323 Return plane P793 Spindle Range 4
P324 Tapping P794 Spindle Range 5
P325 Custom code P795 Spindle Range 6
P326 Custom M-code P796 Spindle Range 7
P327 Custom G-code P797 Spindle Range 8
P328 Feed per Rev (wait for marker) P798 Max Graph Size
P329 Feedrate override Lock P812 Block Rate
P330 Spindle override Lock P814 Cad Epsilon
P335 Hard Tap Fudge Factor
P365 Feed per Minute Feedrate P815- Unassigned
P366 Feed per Rev Feedrate P816
P367 RPM Spindle Speed
P368 CSF Spindle Speed P817 Spindle Encoder PPU1
P369 Job time P818 Actual Spindle RPM
P370 True tool number P840 Pulse Delay
P399 Spindle Jog Speed P841 Max Spindle RPM
P400 Work G50 axis 1 (Z) P842 Tapping Ramp Low Gear
P401 Work G50 axis 2 (X) P843 Spindle Acceleration Ramp
P406 Work G52 axis 1 (Z) P844 Spindle Deceleration Ramp
P407 Work G52 axis 2 (X) P850 ADC Sample
P412 Work coordinate 1 (Z) P851 ADC Scale
P413 Work coordinate 1 (X) P852 ADC Value
P418 Work coordinate 2 (Z) P853 ADC Trigger
P419 Work coordinate 2 (X) P854 Tapping Ramp High Gear
P424 Work coordinate 3 (Z) P855 Spindle Encoder PPU2
P425 Work coordinate 3 (X) P893 Soft Start Delay

317
APPENDIX

P894 Clamped Feedrate P1008 Rapid velocity (Z)

P895 Cranking Max ipm P1009 Rapid acc/dec (Z)
P896 Handwheel Encoder PPU P1010 Home sequence (Z)
P897 Cranking Minutes Per Turn P1011 Velocity toward home (Z)
P898 Screen Blank Time P1012 Velocity away from home (Z)
P899 Digitizing Enable P1013 Velocity toward marker (Z)
P1014 Encoder multiplier (Z)
P910- Spindle Speeds P1015 Slow jog velocity (Z)
925 P1016 Slow jog acc/dec (Z)
P1017 Rapid jog velocity (Z)
P926- Manual Per Min Feeds P1018 Rapid jog acc/dec (Z)
942 P1019 In position (Z)
P1020 G00 unidirectional (Z)
P943- Manual Per Rev Feeds P1021 G60 unidirectional (Z)
959 P1022 Backlash (Z)
P1023 Excess error (Z)
P960 Manual 1st Depth P1024 Rotary=0 Linear=1 (Z)
P961 Manual Minimum cut P1025 English Lead (Z)
P962 Manual Finish Passes P1026 English Trail (Z)
P963 Max Corner Deviation P1027 Metric Lead (Z)
P965 SpindleScale P1028 Metric Trail (Z)
(fraction of full spindle dac) P1029 Jog Key Direction (Z)
P966 Minimum Block Time (seconds, P1041 Home Marker Switch (Z)
min time when not in fast DNC) (Home Switch = 0, Marker = 1)
P968 Minimum Linear Feed AccDec P1042 G28 reference point (Z)
P969 Minimum Rotary Feed AccDec P1043 G30 reference point 2 (Z)
P970 Minimum Linear Rapid AccDec P1044 G30 reference point 3 (Z)
P971 Minimum Rotary Rapid AccDec P1045 G30 reference point 4 (Z)
P972 Quill Epsilon P1046 Max Handwheel Error (Z)
P973 Front Panel Base Port P1049 Feed Back (Z)
P974 Quill Scale PPU P1050 Invert Handwheel (Z)
(non-zero = invert handwheel
P1000- Axis 1 Address (Z) direction)
P1099 P1051 Gain Proportional (Z)
P1052 Gain Velocty (Z)
P1100- Axis 2 Address (X) P1053 Gain Acceleration (Z)
P1199 P1054 Gain Handwheel (Z)
P1055 Feed S-Curve Acc\Dec (Z)
P1000 Axis address label (Z) P1056 Rapid S-Curve Acc\Dec (Z)
P1001 Pulses per unit (Z)
P1002 Home position (X) P1100- Same as above only for (X) axis
P1003 Home direction (Z) P1199
P1004 Positive limit (Z)
P1005 Negative limit (Z) P1501 Software Version
P1006 Maximum feed (Z) P1504 Turret Pocket Count
P1007 Dry run feed (Z)

318
 APPENDIX

P1600- Thermo Degrees per Volt

P1607

P1608- Thermo Inches per Volt

P1615

P1616- Thermo Inverse Growth per

P1623 Degree

P1624- Thermo Position Sensor

P1631

P1632- Thermo Voltage Reference

P1639

P1640- Thermo Position Reference

P1647

P1700- Security Codes

P1799

P2000- X Axis Tool Wears

P2024

P2025- Z Axis Tool Wears

P2049

P2050- R Tool Wears

P2074

P2100- X Axis Tool Lengths

P2124

P2124- Z Axis Tool Lengths

P2149

P2150- Tool Radius

P2174

P2175- Tool Types

P2199

319
APPENDIX

J1-J4 I/O Scheme

Explanation of I/O Scheme Change

With a change of interface panels from sinking (active low) to sourcing (active high) on
Centurion 7 / 7000 Series controls in 2007, the I/O designations were revised for clarity.
Centurion 1,5,& 6 controls are always active low and use the old I/O scheme.

To determine the I/O display/addressing type on your Centurion 7 / 7000 Series control, press
DISP-DIAG to see if keys J1–J4 are displayed, or if X,Y,Z,etc. are displayed. J1-J4 is the new
way, and X,Y,Z,etc. (or 1,2,3,etc.) is the old way.

On some systems I/O is described by axis numbers. These systems are the same as X,Y,Z, or
Z,X,AUX1,AUX2, etc. but are called 1,2,3 respectively. The systems display the axis number in
the diagnostic display keys.

Refer to screen shot graphics on pages 322 & 323 to see the new type.

Old designations (All Centurion 1,5,6, and some Centurion 7 controls):

Axis Designation IN/OUT I/O #
• X,Y,Z,A,B,etc. IN or OUT #1-12 (mill control)
• Z,X,AUX1,AUX2,etc. IN or OUT #1-12 (lathe control)
• 1,2,3,4,5, etc. IN or OUT #1-12

New designations (newer Centurion 7 / 7000 Series controls built 2007 and later):
J1 and J2 include inputs 1-72
• Inputs 1-36 use J1-1 to J1-36
• Inputs 37-72 use J2-1 to J2-36

J3 and J4 include outputs 1-72

• Outputs 1-36 use J3-1 to J3-36
• Outputs 37-72 use J4-1 to J4-36

Old vs. New conversion examples (lathe):

• Zin-1 = J1-1, or input #1 New J1 - Inputs 1-36
• Aux1in-12 = J1-36, or input #36

• Aux2in-1 = J2-1, or input #37 New J2 - Inputs 37-72

• Aux4in-12 = J2-36,or input #72

• Zout-1 = J3-1, or output #1 New J3 – Outputs 1-36

• Aux1out-12 = J3-36, or output #36

• Aux2out-1 = J4-1, or output #37 New J4 – Outputs 37-72

• Aux4out-1 = J4-36, or output #72

320
The new STO 1-72 commands as compared to old SET commands are listed below. See I/O
screens on the following pages for further descriptions.

New New I/O Old Old I/O #

New I/O #
Command pin Command & pin
STO1 1 J3-1 Set Z1 Z-out 1
STO2 2 J3-2 Set Z2 Z-out 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........
STO11 11 J3-11 Set Z11 Z-out 11
STO12 12 J3-12 Set Z12 Z-out 12
Old X transitions to Y
STO13 13 J3-13 Set X1 X-out 1
STO14 14 J3-14 Set X2 X-out 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........
STO23 23 J3-23 Set X11 X-out 11
STO24 24 J3-24 Set X12 X-out 12
Old Y transitions to Z
STO25 25 J3-25 Set Aux1 1 Aux1-out 1
STO26 26 J3-26 Set Aux1 2 Aux1-out 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........
STO35 35 J3-35 Set Aux1 11 Aux1-out 11
STO36 36 J3-36 Set Aux1 12 Aux1-out 12
New J3 transitions to J4 Old Z transitions to A
STO37 37 J4-1 Set Aux2 1 Aux2-out 1
STO38 38 J4-2 Set Aux2 2 Aux2-out 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........
STO47 47 J4-11 Set Aux2 11 Aux2-out 11
STO48 48 J4-12 Set Aux2 12 Aux2-out 12
Old A transitions to B
STO49 49 J4-13 Set Aux3 1 Aux3-out 1
STO50 50 J4-14 Set Aux3 2 Aux3-out 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........
STO59 59 J4-23 Set Aux3 11 Aux3-out 11
STO60 60 J4-24 Set Aux3 12 Aux3-out 12
Old B transitions to Aux1
STO61 61 J4-25 Set Aux4 1 Aux4-out 1
STO62 62 J4-26 Set Aux4 2 Aux4-out 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........
STO71 71 J4-35 Set Aux4 11 Aux4-out 11
STO72 72 J4-36 Set Aux4 12 Aux4-out 12

CLEAR commands work in the same fashion as listed above and the commands are as follows;
New command=CLO, Old command=CLR

321
APPENDIX

White = active

New I/O display J1 inputs

White = active

New I/O display J2 inputs

322
White = active

New I/O display J3 outputs

White = active

New I/O display J4 outputs

323